Home

ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming

1. __ EFNT Resource Resource Table Background Color 9 Other resource A Foreground Color A ed Font 2 Spacing X Tabe Spacing Y Fontfile EFNT 00 Horizontal Align amp Vertical Align Font 01 5 1 Background Transp Font 02 Other resource Foreground Transp ipea d 1 1 Other resource 1 1 Font 29 x DN i 27 EFNT Resource Fontfile EFNT Font 30 di 90 lt Background Color Foreground Color Spacing X Spacing Y N Horizontal Align N Vertical Align Fontfile EFNT Background Transp X Foreground Transp Font 31 Other resource The following commands are provided to manage the contents of the Font table FONTS INIT Initializes the Font table setting all of the entries to defaults FONTS LIST start end FONTS LIST start end Prints a list of the current contents of the Font table optionally to a previously opened file N May also specify a starting and ending font number to select which font numbers to list FONTS LOAD filename fonts Loads the Font table from a JSON formatted file on the microSD card See the appendix JSON File Formats in the Color 320x240 LCD Display Terminal User s Manual FONTS SAVE filename fonts Saves the current contents of the Font table to a JSON formatted file on the micro
2. 136 BESE ote in n on ae AOR arta ett REM 136 Statements REI RE CU ee ENSE CE Se 136 IIb 136 INPET vat feces aoreet RR Heu teen 137 INPUT prompt I ee etate tlt eed teet eet 137 dr EE 137 LET var expr default statement entren enne 137 LIF test THEN statement statement Lise eene enne nren enne eene nennen enne 137 LIST start end LIST start end J seeeeeseeeeeneeeneeenenennen eene enne 138 LIST N start end LIST N start end J seen 138 LOAD shes d tetto Dr e pp qub pnt e men 138 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 MD path PR 138 MEMORY oS ee Ee A ER eR A 138 NEW assoc ab pee Ra pni e ie ee ae EE 139 ON expr GOSUB lineO line line2 139 ON expr GOTO line line2 1 139 ONERROR GOTO linc pnr Aeneid DP eb n DER PED PR 140 ONEVENT systemvar GOSUB line esee 141 OPENAN path optloHs ooo ee oen ten oe epist 142 ORDER Ime eene eee elo tee e Bee hte tend eec e eb n t een 142 PLAY file ierit teg a e eric o n hid ei t Actelion te
3. 89 QFONT FTRANSP n 5 eiue tee p rr DRE ee tegere 89 5 eR rot pbi ittis eU mon ed 9 QSCHEME tete trt pet Uter pg HRS 91 SCHEME BCOLORIN t te tit m ee ee deer 91 QSCHEME WCOLOR n init tti ite tet eee e CH 91 QSCHEME COLORIZE n 5 2 re e te eg tede he eed iie ees 92 92 QSCHEME TRANSP n eh BI eee bi ee e e tede 93 E nS 94 QSCREEN BIMAGES n eese esses eese estet ennt tienen teens 94 QSCREEN X n iet ettet e re BS RE at t Ee ERG RE n 94 QSCREEN Y n x tne RI tea pee un HR rH RU LS 94 OS CREEN H i erepti eri TW hoe UU pe peeing po m Res 94 QSCREEN EVENT t ent a a e selene REUS EE eves ees Oe Md 94 5 WE o AGA aes 96 SCREEN OBJ TYPE Screen object eese sees eee entente entente 97 Icon Screen Object SA ei aig ME BRUM 97 Button Screen Object eiie eet eet Eee reet pL eden Me eee RE 98 Toggle Button Screen Object pete us ane oE EEEE tee RR Pete 98 Back Button Screen Object nete tete iieri et de iibro rends 99 Slid
4. 130 DIR path eee ed Ee eer RR EE ET er Eee eh 130 DIRGHN roc ap TAPA T Un ORT 130 etre tte ds o RW HERR 130 END ise aor t a rre Ut eta ten d t hee d ee ee Es 130 ERROR 130 FOR var init TO limit STEP increment statements NEXT 131 FINPUT buste Ua Gi o E d aoe uS 131 FPRIN TN expr expEizck pases siti cee ao Ub Ree oa ede d ie tes 131 FOPEN N recordlength path iieri pot poteet Torte 132 FREAD N recordnumber var var var sese 132 FWRITE N recordnumber var 10 0 00000001000000000000000 0 133 FINSERT N recordnumber var var var 133 FDELETE N recordnumber 134 FUNCTION name parml parm2 parmN J sse 135 ENDEFUNCTI ON 5c HR re UE Ue ert UL RE PE ERE HR IER EUROS 135 GOSUB Ime7 GOSUB label uite PR OE e er Eee 135 GOTO Ilme label oid t PE dette eee ttle kien 135 S 136 IF test THEN line label statement ELSE line2 label2 statement2 eese 136 IF 136 SIGLEmOTlS ois
5. Micro SD card good and Resources bin file loaded OK Yes No gt Load Serial Flash Resources 1 The AcsDefaultFont efnt used for the diagnostics and keypad keys and the AcsAnsiFont efnt resources are loaded from internal flash memory 2 The microSD card is detected and if present the file system is initialized 3 A check is made for protected resources located at the top of the external Serial Flash memory they are loaded if found 4 Ifthe microSD card was detected and initialized in step 2 attempt to load the binary resources file named Resources bin If it loads and verifies then initial resource table loading is complete 5 If step 4 fails attempt to load and verify the resources located at the bottom of the external Serial Flash memory Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 154 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 FONTS The appearance of all text that is drawn on the display is controlled by fonts selected from a font table The character images are extracted from previously constructed and loaded EFNT resources Each table entry holds the Font Name EFNT resource name several attributes for horizontal and vertical alignment spacing and background foreground colors and transparency The table holds 32 entries The table entry number is used as the selector of the font for drawing and display access
6. 3 0 4 1 2 mm EE is 4 VALIGN 11 41 1 0 BOTTOM 1 MIDDLE 2 3 0 4 0 3 2 4 0 Wo on The last four OPTION properties configure the needle s minimum and maximum angles and the corresponding minimum and maximum values Both the angles and values can be negative Angles advance in value counter clockwise rotation with zero to the right as shown in the following diagram Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 102 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 The minimum angle is the angle the needle will be drawn at when the object s VALUE is at the specified minimum value The maximum angle is the angle the needle will be drawn at when the object s VALUE is at the specified maximum value 90 degrees SCREEN OBJ OPTION 5 MIN ANGLE 6 MIN VALUE 0 degrees degrees 9 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 7 MAX ANGLE 8 VALUE degrees Here is a bitmap for a tachometer radial gauge And here s a short program that initializes a screen object as a radial gauge using this bitmap then runs the tach from 0 to 10 000 and back down in a loop 5 REM Tachometer 10 ANSI ENABLE 0 BACKLIGHT 1 15 SCHEME WCOLOR RGB 255 0 0 REM needle color 20 SCREEN OBJ TYPE 0 0 8 REM radial gauge 25 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 0 0 95 REM needle length 30 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 0 1 18 REM needle zero 35 SCREE
7. 35 Now for Something at nennen trennen rene ene 36 TEES QU Function asses eo IRR RR ERR IRAN RE OR NG e T este as 37 ES 37 A Casual TIT EE 37 Functions Returning a 38 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Functions Returning a String ice ees te te i eer ee Fo aee ER Eae e Ee de 40 Some Funny Characters 42 Don t Get Boxed 43 EE 43 Don t Repeat depu 44 Rules for Subroutines i ie p err eb ree e e pre br epp 45 Making Changes ette tp te de Ip e ear pn e ete e nee 46 R ules for Editihg eee OR IE reme RI RES 47 There s ahi pepe eee en He pite ce He E ee te e e e E 48 System Timers 49 Rules System Variables s ou ar ee b E Se o ER tee 50 Enough Text Let s Draw Something esee enne ener ennemi enne 50 Je E 50 Clearing The Screen ien eee e dep 51 Drawing LINES op ERR Er EU EE RD eae eR ADES 52 DrawWihg ATOS iaces PRO GR FREU E e PO e ERE 53 Drawing Arc
8. FONT FTRANS entry normal transparent OJIN Pe OINF Il Gets Sets font foreground transparency Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 61 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 And Now Back to Drawing the Text So now we can get back to the DRAW TEXT command As with the other commands here s the command format DRAW TEXT f x y expr Renders the expression on f font table entry number 0 31 the current drawing SURFACE x justification x coordinate 0 319 relative to x y using the y justification y coordinate 0 240 font table entry f values expr the number or string to draw So let s try this out There s already some default entries in the font table What if we write a simple program that draws Hello in the center of the screen using Font zero 10 REM Draw text 20 ANSI ENABLE 0 30 DRAW TEXT 0 160 120 Hello 40 GOTO 40 Let s make the font red set Font zero s foreground color to red before drawing the text 10 REM Draw red text 20 ANSI ENABLE 0 25 FONT FCOLOR RGB 255 0 0 30 DRAW TEXT 0 160 120 Hello 40 GOTO 40 What do all of these alignment options do there are nine combinations Here s a program to show you how the FONT HALIGN and FONT VALIGN system variables control the relative text positioning First we draw a grid using DRAW LINE commands then we DR
9. ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 SCREEN These system variables are used to access the individual elements of the Screen table They require an index that ranges from 0 to 15 to refer to the 16 screen table entries SCREEN BIMAGE 0 SCREEN X 0 SCREEN Y 0 SCREEN OBJ 0 0 Screen SCREEN OBJ 0 1 Table Screen 00 5 01_ SCREEN OBJ 0 31 Screen 02 Screen 13 Sereen 14 GSCREEN BIMAGES 15 9SCREEN X 15 SCREEN Y 15 SCREEN OBJ 15 0 SCREEN OBJ 15 1 GSCREEN OB 15 31 GSCREEN BIMAGES n This system variable is used to set the optional background image for the Screen table entry n to an image resource SCREEN BIMAGE n MyImageResource bmp SCREEN X n This system variable is used to set the lower left horizontal position of the displayed screen SCREEN Y n This system variable is used to set the lower left vertical position of the displayed screen SCREEN This read only system variable reflects the screen number of the last screen event SCREEN EVENT This system variable reflects the last screen event There are two screen events SCREEN EVENT Event 1 Screen SCREEN hidden by SCREENS CHANGETO or SCREENS PUSHTO Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Saraso
10. So how does your program know when the user has pressed the button There is a system variable that gets updated whenever a screen object changes state SCREEN OBJ EVENT This system variable reflects the last screen object event There are currently three screen object events Indicates Screen Object Event 0 No event 1 Screen Object was touched 2 Screen Object value has changed 3 Screen Object was un touched released So let s change the program to watch this system variable and PRINT the event To do this we ll use a new command LIF to control the program execution LIF is short for Long IF If you remember the IF statement from Controlling Program Execution above the command evaluates the following condition and IF it is True non zero THEN it executes the command after the THEN otherwise it skips to the next line The LIF command works the same way except it executes all the commands on the line after the THEN when the condition evaluates to non zero This is useful when you want your program to do more than one command after testing a condition and avoid having to GOTO a new group of commands on another line to do so it can make the program easier to write follow and understand Add lines 50 65 below to the program and run it These new lines test the value of the SCREEN OBJ EVENT system variable and PRINT a message identifying the event The event is then
11. 5 0 1 SCREEN OBV 0 1 SCREEN OBV 0 31 SCREEN BIMAGES 15 M amp SCREEN OBJ 15 0 amp SCREEN OBJ 15 1 SCREEN OBJ OPTION O 0 9 T SCREEN OBJ 15 31 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida SCREEN OBJ TYPE 15 31 SCREEN OBJ IMAGE 15 31 SCREEN OBJ OVERLAY 15 31 SCREEN OBJ SCHEME 15 31 SCREEN OBu X 15 31 SCREEN OBu Y 15 31 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 15 31 SCREEN OBJ MASK 15 31 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 15 31 0 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 15 31 1 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 15 31 9 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 96 ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 SCREEN OBJ TYPE screen object This system variable sets the screen object type for Screens table entry screen object entry SCREEN OBJ TYPE Object Type None Icon Button Toggle Button Back Button Slider Label Touch Keypad Radial Gauge Linear Gauge Listbox Spinner Knob Text Box 15 Icon Screen Object The Icon screen object displays a portion of a bitmap resource where the displayed portion of the bitmap is controlled by the screen object s VALUE The displayed portion of the bitmap may be a square based upon the image width divided by the image height or a portion selec
12. User function called when connection occurs send User function called to send data to file N Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 180 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 User function called to receive data from file N The SOCKET ASYNC CONNECT statement opens the TCP IP network connection as an open file N to the remote device using the ip port string If this is successful execution continues with the following program statements When the connection is established the user provided connect function is called e When this function returns the user provided send function is called to output data to the remote device using PRINT N or FPRINT N statements The send function should return one to wait for received data two to send more data or zero to disconnect e Next the user provided recv function is called to input data from the remote device using INPUT N or FINPUT N statements The recv function should return one to send more data two to receive more data or zero to disconnect The process repeats between send and recv calls until one of the functions returns zero or an error condition occurs SOCKET EVENT N system variable then fires and event and returns numeric value representing the result of the connection GSOCKET EVENT ZN Descri
13. deve Hee n e d s 124 REPLACES var Start var2 neam E eee tlle ene ee e 124 RND Gx pi eis PX EN 124 SIN Ge srees te RUN RR REED REE RH as 124 ST RS Expr ERRORI NR 124 SOCKET SYNC CONNECT N ip port connect send recv esses 124 SOCKET SYNC LISTEN N connect recv 125 UBOUND dimVariable dimNumber enne enne nennen nnn 126 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 VAL EX Pr 126 E DUREE 127 Statements xcd e E ERE ente pee n EORR P RS EE i 128 BREAK line BREAK label esee nennen enne neret tene nene nenne 128 CHANGE string replacement ie eet eterne ROREM 128 CLEAR usto nOD amni an onm Ron 128 Nac P P EA 129 CONST var value 1 var value 1 enne 129 etti ertt eee cords Ee e een n te e det e eee 129 DATA te ao IR a dena ie ee a et eidem 129 DEE path Au eU ERN An RR PI RD RUPEM 129 DELAY Values rt rere re ere Pre deh ab ap ven eee he 129 DIM var size sizel 1262 in
14. 10 REM test socket async connect 20 ONEVENT SOCKET EVENT GOSUB 1020 25 n 0 senddata recvdata done GOSUB 1000 a a 1 LIF done 1 THEN PRINT GOTO 25 35 GOTO 30 1000 REM connection subroutine 1005 PRINT connecting 1010 SOCKET ASYNC CONNECT 0 192 168 1 205 1000 connect send recv 1015 RETURN 1020 ON SOCKET EVENT 0 GOTO no_open no connect send err recv err 1025 RETURN 1030 PRINT unknown done 1 RETURN 1035 ok PRINT success done 1 RETURN 1040 no open PRINT can t open done 1 RETURN 1045 no connect PRINT no connection done 1 RETURN 1050 send err PRINT send error done 1 RETURN 1055 recv err PRINT recv error done 1 RETURN 1060 REM connect function 1065 FUNCTION connect 1070 PRINT connect 1075 ENDFUNCTION 1080 REM send function 1085 FUNCTION send 1090 send LIF lt 10 THEN senddata STR RND 32767 n n 1 FPRINT 40 n senddata PRINT gt n send 1 1095 ENDFUNCTION 1100 REM recv function 1105 FUNCTION recv 1110 FINPUT 0 recvdata LIF recvdata senddata THEN PRINT lt 1 1115 ENDFUNCTION Ready run connecting connect gt 1 lt gt 2 lt gt 3 lt gt 4 lt gt 5 lt gt 6 lt gt 7 lt gt 8 lt gt 9 lt gt 10 lt success a 3091 connecting connect gt 1 lt gt 2
15. 120 PRINT 2 125 PRINT 024 05 130 RETURN Ready run 14 47 15 ESC at line 30 Ready Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 141 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 OPEN N path options Open filename path as file N 0 9 for subsequent access via DIR N INPUT N FINPUT N PRINT N or FPRINT N statements The options string characters are options Description ep opens file for reading if path does not exist an error is generated y opens file for writing if path exists its contents are destroyed opens file for read and write the path must exist opens an empty file for read and write if path exists id its contents are destroyed sap opens file for reading and appending seek to end of file after open opens file in binary mode no translations opens file in text mode default CR LF pairs are translated to LF on input and LF translated to CR LF pairs on output ORDER line Program mode only This statement positions the read data pointer to statement line number The statement at line must be a series of one or more DATA statement PLAY file Plays the sound file and waits until it completes Program execution then continues with the next statement If the file is not a valid file of the correct format sample rate and sample size fo
16. A defined function is executed using the function s name in a command or expression See the User Functions section below for more information ENDFUNCTION Program mode only Ends a user defined function Statements following the ENDFUNCTION command on the same line are not executed When initially defining a FUNCTION the ENDFUNCTION statement terminates the definition When executing a previously defined FUNCTION the ENDFUNCTION causes program execution to return to the statements following the function call GOSUB line GOSUB label Program mode only Calls a subroutine that starts at line or label and ends with a RETURN statement A subroutine consists of a group of program statements that start at a certain line number or label and end in a line with a RETURN statement e To call the subroutine from your program use the GOSUB statement which transfers program execution to the specified line number and executes those program statements until it executes a RETURN statement e Upon execution of the RETURN statement program execution continues at the statement after the GOSUB e number of nested FOR NEXT WHILE WEND loops block IF THEN ELSE ENDIF and GOSUB subroutines is limited GOTO line GOTO label Program mode only Program execution continues by jumping to line or label Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 135 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8
17. DaasOutofRange 56 _ ACS Internal Usage 0000000 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 175 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual Extended Characters 8 September 2014 The following characters may be displayed by sending the multiple decimal byte sequence with CHR a a a C 195 135 195 188 195 169 195 162 195 164 195 160 195 165 195 167 1 1 i A A 195 170 195 171 195 168 195 175 195 174 195 172 195 132 195 133 E e u u 195 137 195 166 195 134 195 180 195 182 195 178 195 187 195 185 y f 195 191 195 150 195 156 194 162 194 163 194 165 Et 198 146 1 a 195 161 195 173 195 179 195 186 195 177 195 145 194 170 194 186 VA VA i 194 191 ve x 194 172 194 189 194 188 194 161 194 171 194 187 E 4 1 1 226 150 226 150 226 150 226 148 226 148 226 149 226 149 226 149 145 146 147 130 164 161 162 150 1 1 1 1 1 J d 4 1 226 149 226 149 226 149 226 149 226 149 226 149 226 149 226 148 149 163 145 151 157 156 155 144 226 148 226 148 226 148 226 148 226 148 226 148 226 149 226 149 148 180 156 156 128 188 158 159 L JL L JL L L Ir T 226 149
18. If the expression evaluates to a negative value or to a value beyond the number of line numbers in the list execution continues with the program statement following the ON command this is the default case if there isn t a line number to jump to for an expression value If the selected line number in the list is zero execution continues with the program statement following the ON command this allows certain expression values within the list of line numbers to be handled as defaults So let s add an event handler for the SCREEN OBJ EVENT We ll use the ON command to help process the event We ll add a label object to the screen The event handler will update the label object s TEXTS to display the button s last state Pressed or Released Here s the revised code 10 REM Button Demo 15 JANSI ENABLE 0 REM Disable ANSI text 20 SCREEN OBJ TYPE 2 REM Set screen object to Button 25 jSCREEN OBJ SCHEME 0 0 0 REM Set button s scheme pair to 0 1 30 SCREEN OBJ X 0 0 116 SCREEN OBJ Y 0 109 REM Set button s location on screen 35 9SCREEN OBJ IMAGE 0 0 ButtonK4 bmp REM Set button s image 40 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 0 0 Prog REM Set button s text 45 SCREEN OBJ TYPE 1 6 REM set screen 0 object 1 to Label 50 SCREEN OBJ SCHEME 0 1 0 REM set label s scheme pair to 0 1 55 SCREEN OBJ X 0 1 160 SCREEN OBJ Y 1 151 REM set label s location on screen 60 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 0 1 0 88 REM override lab
19. c 2s peel enn e eii tanium 168 User Detmed Purictions rs ero pepe ea 169 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 lu ER 174 Extended Charactets eee EO EUR ile pire Ee eminens 176 Socket Programminjg etii 178 ACS Basic 178 Blocking Sockets 3 oe Roten depot tieu eise E S 179 Client Blocking Connection eese eere nennen eren EEE E ES 179 Server Blocking Listen ssc cete eei e e adde reperti ER 180 Non blocking Sockets xe ee ER RUP Ue REED geo ei Rb 180 Client Non blocking rennen ennt tenere 180 Server Non blocking reee parE t EEr 181 Communication Protoco nette 182 Socket Examples eee IO HO REF Rp HE ER ERE beet Pe Eee Ede 183 lsvesurAei rp PH 183 Blocking Setver sen iere pete etie aten deeem in AEs iei eem Ug ren bie 184 Non blockang Client e p aee e eoe ded bee e 185 Non blocking Serv r s tct item Dre e S d e e tet etes eae 186 ACS Basic Examples 522 n
20. this isn t really necessary since variables are set to 0 the first time they re used but it s good practice to start with a known value The program user is then prompted to enter a number for the tempo notice that the INPUT command can have an optional prompt string that it will display before waiting for the user to enter a value and press enter Line 20 checks the tempo that the user entered and if it s not within range requests that the user enter a different value by looping back to line 15 It s always a good idea to validate user input to your programs Notice that it performs two comparisons on the tempo value and then combines them logically with the OR logical operator IF the first condition OR the second condition is True THEN loop back to line 15 Lin 25 counts from one to the tempo value it does nothing but waste time The amount of time that must pass before the FOR NEXT counting loop ends is dependent upon the tempo value entered The d d 1 statement is there solely to slow the loop down so reasonable tempo values have an effect Line 30 prints Tick or Tock depending upon the tick tock variable t Line 35 toggles the tick tock variable t between zero and one Line 40 loops back to the delay loop Try running the program and entering different values for the tempo a value of 4000 seems to be close to 60 beats per minute once a second You will have to ESCape the program to try another tempo run
21. 226 149 226 149 226 149 226 149 226 149 226 149 226 149 154 148 169 166 160 144 172 167 T E F 1 226 149 226 149 226 149 226 149 226 149 226 149 226 149 226 149 164 165 153 152 146 147 171 170 m 1 r B m 226 148 226 148 226 150 226 150 226 150 226 150 226 150 ig 177 152 140 136 132 140 144 128 5 gt T 195 159 206 147 207 128 206 163 207 131 194 181 207 132 206 166 0 9 5 226 136 p 226 137 206 152 206 169 206 180 m 207 134 206 181 t i gt lt a 226 137 226 137 226 140 226 140 226 137 194 177 ur m 195 183 ue 194 176 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 176 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 J n 2 a 1 gt 226 136 226 129 226 150 226 134 226 134 226 134 1989 154 191 dis 160 144 145 146 226 134 147 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 177 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Socket Programming ACS Basic provides a set of primitives that allow networked devices to exchange messages using a pre arranged protocol One or more devices can communicate using TCP IP over the Ethernet interface in a client server fashion The implementation of this network communication is referred to as socket progr
22. IntFunction two IntFunction one IntFunction value Int value Int value Int value Int value Int value Int value Int value Int value gt Int value Int He He He He He He He He Hi He 22222222232 D D D D D D D D D D E E ED ED NNNNNNNNNNNODOOWOOODOOO Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 173 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Errors The following errors can be produced The placeholder dd in the message is replaced with the line number where the error was detected if the error was encountered in a running program Some Syntax Errors will provide additional information after the line number further identifying the error 4 5 IMs Pla CLOSE LIST PRINT or INPUT without successful OPEN File not open error in line dd 10 12 13 CONE CLOSURE x OPENING x subscript out of Stack Overflow error in line dd Too many nested FOR and or GOSUB and or events No SD card error in line dd Statement requiring microSD card with no card detected Invalid WAV file error in line dd EE format not 44 1 KHz 16 bit mono or stereo or SOUND DRAW x arguments Out of Range error in line dd One or more argument to a DRAW x statement are out of range FWRITE record Out of Range error in line dd
23. PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 FOR I 1 TO 10 PRINT NEXT I PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 FOR I 1 TO 10 PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 NEXT I PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 RETURN CHR 140 CHR 128 CHR 144 CHR 130 CHR 130 CHR 148 CHR 128 CHR 152 REM Print the Unicode prefix characters PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 RETURN And now we have to change lines 10005 10015 10025 10030 10050 10055 10065 and 10075 You could type these lines over but as we ll see soon ACS Basic has a shortcut the EDIT command Rules for Subroutines 1 Any block of code can be turned into a subroutine by adding a RETURN command as the last line and then calling the code using the GOSUB command 2 GOSUB commands must be paired with RETURN commands you can t GOTO in or out of a subroutine While it may appear to work the stack that Basic uses to remember where to RETURN to will eventually become confused and an error will occur To leave a subroutine GOTO the subroutine s RETURN statement 3 Subroutines can be nested code inside a subroutine can call another subroutine Copyright 2010 2 014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 45 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Making Changes Type EDIT 10005 Notice how Basic prints out the line but stays at the end it doesn t show the Ready prompt The cursor i
24. REM sorting strings CONST size 10 DIM a size FOR n 0 TO size 1 FOR i 0 TO 5 a n a n CHR RND 25 65 NEXT i NEXT n PRINT before sort FOR n 0 TO size 1 PRINT a n NEXT n SORT a PRINT PRINT after soft FOR n 0 TO size 1 PRINT a n NEXT n PRINT Ready run before sort AWRLHC APIAER XMDYBJ UDEMUI EJODGW HWWYJC VFRHND NEVMPH UJIPJG TKGKRK after soft APIAER AWRLHC EJODGW HWWYJC NEVMPH TKGKRK UDEMUI UJIPJG VFRHND XMDYBJ Ready SMTP SERVER name ipaddress port usernameb64 passwordb64 Program mode only Prepares the SMTP network stack with parameters for a subsequent SMTP SEND command e first two parameters are required and specify the mail server name and the mail server s IPv4 address e third parameter specifies the TCP IP port which defaults to 25 if not specified Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 145 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 e The last two parameters are optional and are used to perform an authenticated login in response to an AUTH LOGIN status from the mail server The usernameb64 is the response sent to the Username prompt encoded as a Base64 string and the passwordb64 is the response sent the Password prompt encoded as a Base64 string No other authentication mechanism is supported Specify a connection to an intranet mail relay at I
25. Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 64 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Warning Mathematics In mathematics the trigonometric functions also called circular functions are functions of an angle They are used to relate the angles of a triangle to the lengths of the sides of a triangle The most familiar trigonometric functions are the sine and cosine In the context of the standard unit circle with radius 1 where a triangle is formed by a ray originating at the origin and making some angle with the x axis the sine of the angle gives the length of the y component rise of the triangle and the cosine gives the length of the x component run Trigonometric functions are commonly defined as ratios of two sides of a right triangle containing the angle and can equivalently be defined as the lengths of various line segments from a unit circle Here s a drawing showing this relationship Y x radius Cos angle y radius Sin angle SS NL amp Nx AN 97 Vs As we saw earlier in the section on functions the ACS Color Basic has both SIN and COS functions These trig functions take an angle argument and return the unit circle ratios up scaled by 1024 since this Basic only provides integer math In order to perform the radius multiplication and subsequent down scaling by 1024 the MULDIV function is used This function multiplie
26. PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 CHR 130 FOR I 1 TO 10 PRINT NEXT I PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 CHR 130 PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 CHR 148 FOR I 1 TO 10 PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 CHR 128 NEXT I PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 CHR 152 And now RUN it Ready save ansibox Ready If it works as shown then you can save it for later Now you re probably asking yourself why are the line numbers so large The large line numbers allow us to come back later and put some lower numbered lines before these In this example they re going to let us save some typing Character Rules 1 Characters are actually a displayed version of a single number 2 first 128 characters numbers 0 127 have been agreed upon and are referred to as the ASCII character set Refer to http www asciitable com 3 There is a built in function CHR that can convert a numeric argument into a character 4 Additional extended characters may be displayed using multiple character prefix codes 5 Using Basic PRINT commands on the display is known as ANSI operation Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 43 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Don t Repeat Yourself Suppose that you want to draw two boxes one above the other You could type the same thing in again duplicating all of these lines Your programs would tend to get quite large and you might
27. oN Toggle the Work and Display surfaces 6 Repeat from step 4 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 66 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Let s modify the sonar sweep program to use this double buffering approach Here s the DRAW COPY command format from the reference DRAW COPY src sx sy dx dy w h Src source surface number 0 1 2 Copies the width x height sx source lower left x coordinate 0 319 bitmap from the src Sy source lower left y coordinate 0 240 surface sx sy on the dx destination lower left x coordinate 0 319 current drawing SURFACE dy destination lower left y coordinate 0 240 at dx dy w width of area to copy 1 320 h height of area to copy 1 240 First we ll select the background surface clear it and draw in the circle which is static it doesn t change SURFACE 2 DRAW FILL 0 0 320 240 RGB 0 0 0 DRAW CIRCLE centerX centerY radius RGB 255 255 255 Next we ll select the work surface SURFACE 1 Then we copy the background surface area encompassing the circle and draw the sweep line on it DRAW COPY 2 leftX leftY leftX leftY width height lineX MULDIV radius 1 COS angle 1024 lineY MULDIV radius 1 SIN angle 1024 DRAW LINE centerX centerY centerX lineX centerY lineY RGB 255 255 255 Finally we toggle the work and display surfaces then rinse and repeat DRAW TOGGLE
28. 1234 1234 1234 ESC at line 20 Ready ONERROR GOTO line Program mode only Provides one shot error handling Upon any error statement execution starts at line and the ERR function has the value of the error number and the ERR function has the string version of the error number The ONERROR condition is then cleared so that subsequent errors result in program termination The ONERROR can be disabled by specifying a line number of zero 10 ONERROR GOTO 100 20 REM error follows 30 a 10 0 40 STOP 100 PRINT Error ERR ERR Ready run Error 6 Divide by zero error in line 30 Ready A common use of ONERROR statement is to allow execution of a command that might fail without causing the program to stop execution For example if you want to delete a file with the DEL command if the file didn t exist the DEL command would produce an error and the program would stop By setting up an ONERROR handler to bracket the DEL command the program will continue execution if the file to be deleted did or did not exist 170 ONERROR GOTO 180 DEL WAVLIST TXT ONERROR GOTO 180 REM execution continues here even if WAVLIST TXT didn t exist The ONERROR statement can also be used to perform error logging There is an example of error logging in the ACS Basic Examples section below Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 140 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2
29. 25 itemType CONFIG TYPE item fields CONFIG FIELDS item min CONFIG MIN item max CONFIG MAX item 30 GOSUB ShowItem GOSUB HandleKeys 35 WEND 8000 REM 8005 REM handle ansi terminal key input 8010 REM 8015 HandleKeys key GETCH 1 8020 REM 8025 REM Ansi escape sequences for arrow keys 8030 REM 8035 IF key 27 THEN 8040 key GETCH 1 8045 IF CHR key THEN 8050 key GETCH 1 8055 REM 8060 REM down arrow key 8065 REM 8070 CHR key THEN 8075 IF editing THEN item item 1 8080 IF item gt items 1 THEN item 8085 ENDIF 8090 8095 up arrow key 8100 REM 8105 CHR key THEN 8110 IF editing 0 THEN item item 1 8115 IF item lt 0 THEN item items 2 8120 ENDIF Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 193 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 REM REM right arrow key REM IF CHR key C AND editing 1 THEN GOSUB UpdateField IF fields AND field lt fields 1 THEN field field 1 ENDIF REM REM left arrow key REM IF CHR key D AND editing 1 THEN GOSUB UpdateField IF fields AND field gt THEN field field 1 ENDIF ENDIF ELSE REM REM enter key REM IF key 13 THEN IF editing 0 THEN field editing 1 ELSE GOSUB UpdateField CONFIG WRITE item 1 editing 0 ENDIF ENDIF REM REM plus key REM IF CHR key AND editin
30. 3000 tempo 27 IF TIMER gt THEN GOTO 27 30 IF t THEN PRINT Tick ELSE PRINT Tock 35 IF t O THEN t 1 ELSE t O 40 GOTO 25 And you can run it and try different tempo values Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 49 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Rules for System Variables 1 System variables access and control Color LCD system functions System variable names are prefixed with an character System variables can have different meanings if they are read versus written Some system variables are read only me Some system variables are implemented as an array and require an index for selection Enough Text Let s Draw Something Up to now we have been PRINTing in ANSI operation That s nice but what about some graphics The Color LCD and ACS Basic provide several commands to draw graphics on the screen The graphic drawing commands use pairs of numbers to identify where you want to draw on the display In computer terminology these are referred to as screen coordinates The first number of the pair is the X coordinate and identifies a horizontal starting point that ranges from zero to one less than the width of the display 0 319 The second number of the pair is the Y coordinate and identifies a vertical starting point that ranges from zero to one less than the height of the display 0 239 The X and
31. DOW The event occurs once per day at midnight DATE The event occurs once per day at midnight MONTH The event occurs once per month at midnight of day 1 YEAR The event occurs once per year SOUND The event occurs after the last queued SOUND sound has finished playing GMSG The event occurs after receipt of a serial character stream delineated by the SOM and EOM characters The event occurs upon complete transmission of a serial character stream EOT of one or more characters when both the output buffer and UART are empty TOUCH KEYPAD The event triggers upon a change in the display touch keypad status TOUCH EVENT The event triggers upon user touch interaction with the display touchscreen SCREEN OBJ EVENT The event triggers upon user touch interaction with the screen object SCREEN EVENT The event triggers as each SCREEN is displayed or hidden Each ACS Basic implementation may have additional system variables that may cause events Please consult each product s manual for details Here is a short program that outputs the current time once per second on the serial port Note that the program s idle loop which it executes while waiting for the second event to occur consists of a single GOTO statement jumping to itself 5 REM print the time once per second 10 ONEVENT SECOND GOSUB 100 20 GOTO 20 100 PRINT CHR 13 105 PRINT FMT 2d HOUR 110 PRINT 115 PRINT FMT 2d MINUTE
32. Enter tempo 1 32766 4000 Tick Tock Tick Tock Tick Tock Tick Tock Tick ESC at line 25 Ready So how can we improve this program It sure would be more useful to just enter the beats per minute instead of an arbitrary number And this program kind of works backwards a higher tempo value should result in a faster beats per minute not slower Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 48 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 We could try different equations to compute a delay loop count that corresponds to the requested tempo value but that would take a lot of trial and error to get the correct calculation that would relate the two values A better idea would be to use some kind of timer that we could control System Timers The Color LCD system has such a timer in fact there are ten of them How do you access them and how do they work In ACS Basic system variable is identified by preceding the name with the character To access the first timer you would write TIMER O value REM sets timer value TIMER REM gets timer 0 There is an array of ten timers numbered 0 9 You might have guessed that the zero in brackets is telling Basic that you want timer number 0 The brackets indicate that you are selecting a single timer the one identified by the number in between In computer terminology this is referred to as indexing
33. Like numbers you can also compare strings The two strings are compared a character at a time to determine if they are the same less than or greater than each other PRINT ONE TWO 0 Ready PRINT ONE lt gt TWO 1 Ready PRINT ONE gt TWO 0 Ready PRINT ONE lt TWO 1 Ready Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 35 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Now for Something at Random By now we ve learned a few different commands that the Color LCD Basic understands Let s try something new Type this line 10 PRINT RND 10 1 And now RUN it The display printed a random number between 0 and 9 RUN it a few more times 10 PRINT RND 10 Ready RUN 8 Ready RUN 7 Ready RUN 5 Ready RUN 1 Ready Now make the program loop back to run continuously Add line 20 to the program and RUN it You will have to ESCape the program to stop it 20 GOTO 10 LIST 10 PRINT RND 10 20 GOTO 10 0 RN OO WOW DN ESC at line 10 Ready What if we want to have random number from 0 to 100 Changed line 10 to this and RUN it 10 PRINT RND 100 LIST 10 PRINT RND 100 20 GOTO 10 RUN 59 51 31 73 82 62 38 92 78 58 71 84 28 94 46 43 2 59 26 80 32 41 44 43 12 31 30 84 18 58 4 80 11 3 56 39 14 60 0 42 33 95 95 9 56 80 91 16 54 7 86 37 12 25 45 37 82 67 29 95 26 9 23 62 74 57 80 6 16 83 85
34. Only Whole Numbers Please Now let s try dividing two numbers that don t divide evenly say 10 divided by 3 PRINT 10 3 3 Ready What happened Shouldn t 10 divided by 3 equal 3 and 1 3 It should but this shows a limitation of ACS Basic it only knows how to work with whole numbers not decimals or fractions So when it divides 10 by 3 it returns the whole number part and discards the fractional part In computer terminology this is referred to as integer arithmetic While this can be a limitation for solving some problems most applications of the Color LCD can be performed only using integers and there are some workarounds that we ll examine later Remember the modulo operator can return the remainder of the same division The Size of Numbers So if ACS Basic can only work with whole numbers how big can they be What s the limit This Basic works with what programmers refer to as short integers they are 32 computer bits wide A computer bit can only be on or off when you have 32 of them across with each one able to be on or off the biggest number that they can represent is 4 294 967 295 which is the number 2 raised to the 32 power 4 294 967 296 less one reserved for the zero 4 294 967 295 Actually the computer in the ColorLCD reserves 1 bit for a plus or minus indicator a sign bit So there are really only 31 bits available for the actual number So the maximum positive number is 2 147 483 647 and t
35. Receive more Send more data data no Disconnect ss a a ae gt Disconnected yes Done Done e Ay There are two styles of socket programming blocking or synchronous and non blocking or asynchronous ACS Basic has statements and functions to facilitate both styles Synchronous sockets do not Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 178 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 allow any other program statements to be executed while the socket is connected sending or receiving program execution is totally consumed by the socket command Asynchronous sockets initiate the socket operation and then return program execution to the program the status of the socket command is returned via a system event variable Blocking Sockets Synchronous or blocking socket operations are implemented using both built in and user defined functions The built in function s return value provides the program with the status of the operation The user defined functions are called by the built in function to provide control points during the socket operation There are two blocking functions to implement the client or server on a device Client Blocking Connection The synchronous socket client connection takes the form SOCKET SYNC CONNECT N ip port connect send recv N File number ip port String representation of IPv4 add
36. cleared by setting it to zero and loops back to the top of the stack of LIF statements Try pressing and releasing the button and see what it printed 10 REM Button Demo 15 ANSI ENABLE REM Disable ANSI text 20 SCREEN OBJ TYPE 2 REM Set screen object 0 type to Button 25 SCREEN OBJ SCHEME 0 REM Set button s scheme pair to 0 1 30 SCREEN OBJ X 0 0 116 SCREEN OBJ Y 0 109 REM Set button s location on screen 35 SCREEN 0BJ IMAGE 0 0 ButtonK4 bmp REM Set button s image 40 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 0 Press REM Set button s text 45 SCREENS CHANGETO 0 REM Activate screen O 50 LIF SCREEN OBJ EVENT 1 THEN PRINT Pressed SCREEN OBJ EVENT 0 GOTO 50 55 LIF SCREEN OBJ EVENT 2 THEN PRINT Value SCREEN OBJ EVENT 0 GOTO 50 60 LIF SCREEN OBJ EVENT 3 THEN PRINT Released SCREEN OBJ EVENT 0 GOTO 50 65 GOTO 50 999 GOTO 999 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 73 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 run Pressed Value Released Value Pressed Value Released Value Note the sequence of screen object events Pressed Value Released Value A button only has two values 0 and 1 but other controls like a slider can have several values that change between being pressed then released Multiple Objects So how does your program handle events for multiple objects on a screen There is another system variable t
37. content is transferred to the label control on the same line and the textbox is cleared Touching the Number textbox pops up the numeric keypad and animates the textbox rectangle indicating that the control has focus Pressed keys are entered until the Enter key is pressed then the control s TEXT content is transferred to the label control on the same line and the textbox is cleared Enter Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 110 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 SCREEN OBJ SCHEME screen object This system variable sets the Scheme table entry of the scheme or lower entry of the Scheme pair that is used to render this screen object table entry SCREEN OBJ X screen object This system variable sets the X coordinate of the position of the screen object relative to the screen for this screen object table entry SCREEN OBJ Y screen object This system variable sets the X coordinate of the position of the screen object relative to the screen for this screen object table entry SCREEN OBJ VALUE screen object This system variable sets or retrieves the value associated with the screen object for this screen object table entry The values are specific to each SCREEN OBJ TYPE TBD need descriptions of all of the Object Types and how their values interact here SCREEN OBJ TOUCHED screen object This system variable sets or retrieves the touch state
38. occurs Incorrect data formatting in the file can cause a Syntax Error to occur 10 OPEN 0 test csv 20 LIF FILE SIZE THEN PRINT empty file END FINPUT 0 Number Number 40 LIF FEOF 0 THEN PRINT Number Number GOTO 30 Ready type test csv 0 zero 1 one 2 two Ready run 0 zero 1 one 2 two Ready FPRINT N expr Prints one or more expression s to the file N 0 9 that is OPENed for writing as a single line The data items on the line in the file are separated by commas with string values surrounded by double quotes The produced file is compatible with the FINPUT N statement Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 131 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 10 OPEN 0 test csv w 20 FPRINT 0 zero FPRINT 0 1 one FPRINT 0 2 two 30 CLOSE 0 run Ready Type test csv 0 zero 1 one 2 two Ready FOPEN N recordlength path Opens filename path as a fixed record length file N 0 9 for subsequent sequential random access via FREAD FWRITE statements Ifrecordlength is negative or greater than 255 it is forced to 255 Therecordlength includes the trailing CR LF character pair that terminates each record e Ifthe file is empty FEOF N will be set FREAD 3 recordnumber var var var Reads ASCII data from fixed length
39. 0 stro 1 stri 2 str2 3 str3 4 str4 5 str5 6 str6 7 str7 8 str8 9 str9 Ready list 10 LIF FILE EXISTS test dat 0 THEN PRINT no test dat END 20 FOPEN 1 20 test dat FDELETE 1 0 0 WHILE FEOF 1 0 40 FREAD 1 r Number String LIF FEOF 1 THEN PRINT Number String 1 60 WEND 70 CLOSE 1 Ready run 1 stri str2 str3 str4 str5 str6 str7 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 134 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 8 str8 9 str9 Ready FUNCTION name parm1 parm2 parmN Program mode only Defines a user function of name Functions may be either integer or string using the variable naming convention of a trailing dollar sign for strings Functions require zero or more integer or string parameters enclosed in a parenthesized parameter list e Functions are defined by statements beginning with a FUNCTION command and ending with an ENDFUNCTION command e Statements following the FUNCTION command on the same line are not executed e Functions may be redefined using the same function name as long as the integer or string function type is not changed The function name behaves like a global integer or string variable that has a zero or empty string value when the function is defined and can be used to provide a value to or return a value from the function
40. 1100 REM recv function 1105 FUNCTION recv 1110 1 FINPUT 0 n recvdata PRINT n 1115 ENDFUNCTION Ready run listening no connection a 33407 listening connect lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 5 gt lt 6 gt lt 7 gt lt 8 gt lt 9 gt lt 10 gt disconnect a 41115 listening connect lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 5 gt lt 6 gt lt 7 gt lt 8 gt lt 9 gt lt 10 gt disconnect a 44172 listening connect lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 5 gt lt 6 gt lt 7 gt lt 8 gt lt 9 gt lt 10 gt disconnect a 47228 listening connect lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 5 gt lt 6 gt lt 7 gt lt 8 gt lt 9 gt lt 10 gt disconnect a 50284 listening connect lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 5 gt lt 6 gt lt 7 gt lt 8 gt lt 9 gt lt 10 gt disconnect a 53340 listening connect disconnect a 53832 listening lt lt lt ESC at line 30 gt gt gt Ready Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 186 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 ACS Basic Examples Here are a few sample programs that illustrate the various ACS Basic language features and what can be done with a few lines of code Setting the Real Time Clock Set the Color LCD s Real Time Clock with this short program The program prompts for the values of the Month Date Year Hour Minute and Second while range checking the values
41. 47 Program lines that are entered without a line number are executed directly Only certain statements may be executed directly When ACS Basic is awaiting statement or program line entry it issues a READY prompt via the serial port Ready dir bas TEVENT BAS PROGRAM BAS SOUNDS BAS TEST BAS CEVENTS BAS PROGRAM2 BAS ONGOTO BAS ONGOSUB BAS TIMER BAS CHIMES BAS LCDDEMO BAS MSGTEST BAS 11 09 2058 11 09 2058 01 01 1980 01 01 1980 01 01 1980 11 09 2058 05 08 2052 11 09 2058 11 15 2058 09 07 2021 11 13 2020 11 11 2020 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 0 directories Programs may be entered line at a time by a stream of characters via the serial port or by loading from a file off of an optional microSD card When entered via the serial port a program line will replace any matching program line and entering a line number only will delete the corresponding program line Entered program lines are limited to 255 characters of length 10 PRINT This is a Test 20 STOP list 10 PRINT This is a Test 20 STOP Ready 20 list 10 PRINT This is a Test Ready run This is a Test Ready print This is also a Test This is also a Test Ready Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 77 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 ACS strongly recommends developing Basic programs interactively via a connected terminal computer or optional P
42. 68 64 39 22 45 37 81 50 56 93 56 58 4 70 17 0 28 81 99 61 22 36 74 27 9 19 129 38 32 87 41 18 35 12 70 28 40 60 22 38 83 23 58 23 17 30 75 95 11 46 12 67 7 26 52 7 39 1 70 67 69 39 53 0 63 28 25 94 39 27 86 94 7 20 25 52 94 88 45 38 99 25 92 72 25 45 15 67 5 48 19 66 71 20 51 74 12 36 89 24 6 4 60 80 29 55 65 46 48 30 29 14 86 80 7 84 50 26 74 53 78 44 3 9 19 94 8 24 42 99 92 58 31 73 27 46 23 55 49 29 82 27 75 49 97 54 75 64 88 62 49 8 65 52 73 36 9 74 60 35 62 37 46 63 1 88 46 50 64 5 96 21 43 68 19 77 51 37 71 57 25 55 65 21 84 89 77 72 72 76 68 84 49 6 93 82 42 93 57 75 39 87 94 70 94 61 97 32 45 79 39 92 24 10 49 20 8 7 39 7 16 78 2 16 15 90 53 19 10 11 76 82 99 70 27 83 97 94 29 34 78 35 69 22 70 26 29 84 90 97 97 11 16 3 42 83 77 52 86 39 48 91 80 37 ESC at line 10 Ready Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 36 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Its a Function So the function of RND is to produce random numbers It takes a numeric value between the parentheses computes a random number based upon the number that it s given and then takes on the value of that random number It s kind of like a command and kind of like a variable at the same time In computer terminology these combination command variables are referred to as functions Because they are part of the Basic language and don t have to be rewritten each time you want to use them they are referred to as built in func
43. 8 September 2014 FWRITE N recordnumber var var var Writes ASCII data into fixed length records on file N 0 9 opened by FOPEN N from the list of variables Before the data is written the file is positioned to the desired recordnumber by positioning the file to recordnumber x recordlength 0 recordnumber x recordlength lt 2 147 483 648 e Anegative recordnumber seeks to the current end of the file e Writing at the current end of file extends the file by the record size Writing past the current of file generates a FWRITE record Out of Range error e The data items written to the file are separated by commas with string values surrounded by double quotes e The record is padded with spaces to recordlength including the trailing CR LF character pair which terminates each record e file may be viewed using the TYPE command 10 IF FILE EXISTS test dat THEN DEL test dat 15 FOPEN 1 20 test dat 20 FOR TO 9 FWRITE 1 str 4STR r NEXT r 25 CLOSE 1 Ready run Ready type test dat stre stri str2 str3 str4 str5 str6 str7 str8 str9 FINSERT N recordnumber var var var Inserts ASCII data into fixed length records on file ZN 0 9 opened by FOPEN N from the list of variables using a temporary file FINSERT TMP Before the data is inserted the file is positioned to the desired recordnumber by positioning the f
44. 8615 the HandleKeys subroutine that waits for key input using the GETCH 1 function then processes the received key to navigate amongst the items each item s fields enter and exit editing mode increment decrement or default the current item accept numeric hexadecimal input for certain item types and allow the program to be exited In order to accept the arrow cursor keys as input ANSI escape sequences are decoded The Enter key is used to enter editing mode or exit and save the configuration value Lines 10000 through 10160 are the ShowItem subroutine that displays the currently selected item and field as either being browsed or edited using ANSI escape sequences for inverting the text background Lines 11000 through 11030 the DefaultItem subroutine that sets the currently selected item to its default value Lines 12000 through 12035 are the ShowMenu subroutine that does just that Lines 13000 through 13070 are UpdateField subroutine that updates the currently selected configuration value with the numerically entered value Note that the entire program is written without a GOTO statement and label variables are used to call subroutines Nested block IF THEN ELSE ENDIF statements facilitate this style of programming and are indented to show nesting levels improving the program s readability 10 REM Configuration Editor 15 MSGENABLE 0 20 item items CONFIG ITEMS GOSUB ShowMenu 22 WHILE 1
45. Added FILE EXISTS FILE SIZE and FILE POSITION Added optional starting position argument to FIND Added configurable USB serial functionality 7 2014 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 197 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Corrected handling of directory paths to support nested directories Sep 4 2014 Added support for multidimensional arrays up to 3 dimensions Changed HEX STR to output upper case hexadecimal digits Fixed bugs with FINSERT and FDELETE commands Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 198 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Index Audio closing 129 play 142 delete on card 129 computer terminology delete record 134 additive RGB color model 50 exists function 121 ASCH 42 input from 131 assigning a value to a variable 20 insert record 133 calling a function 37 open for records 132 calling a subroutine 44 print to 131 143 commenting your code 37 print to formatted 143 comparison operators 33 read record 132 concatenation 35 renaming 144 decrementing a non zero timer 49 searching 145 dimensioning an array 57 system variables 80 expression 33 write record 133 filling the screen 51 Programs functions 37 comments 143 indexing into an array 49 create new 139 integer arithmetic 32 line editing 130 modul
46. Function 1000 line 120 Ready Functions can be dynamically redefined as long as the type integer string remains the same In this example the compute function is redefined to calculate the square of its argument the first time then the cube of its argument the next time by executing through it using a GOSUB RETURN 10 REM function redefinition 20 GOSUB 1000 REM define compute FUNCTION as square 30 PRINT compute 10 40 GOSUB 1100 REM define compute FUNCTION as cube 50 PRINT compute 10 60 END 1000 REM compute square 1010 FUNCTION compute value 1020 compute value value 1030 ENDFUNCTION 1040 RETURN REM required for GOSUB redefinition 1100 REM compute cube 1110 FUNCTION compute value 1120 compute value value value 1130 ENDFUNCTION 1140 RETURN REM required for GOSUB redefinition Ready run 100 1000 Ready vars compute r w IntFunction 1000 line 1110 Ready Another example of functions calling functions 10 REM function nesting 30 PRINT ten 2 999 END 1000 FUNCTION ten value 1010 nine value ten value nine PRINT nine Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 171 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 1020 ENDFUNCTION 1030 FUNCTION nine value 1040 eight value nine value eight PRINT eight 1050 ENDFUNCTION 1060 FUNCTION eight value 1070 seven value eight value seven PRIN
47. IF number min THEN number ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Basic Revisions Version Date 222 Nov 15 2012 First release for new 320x240 display hardware 27 2012 e Added support for zero line number fall through in ON GOTO GOSUB statements e Added support for optional PS 2 I O expansion module added CONTACT CLOSURE and OPENING system variables and events Dec 17 2012 e Added support for internal programming application e Changed ERRS to return the full error message e Added setting clearing of FEOF n after OPEN n if file is empty e Added SOUNDS queued sound support e Added user function capability with FUNCTION ENDFUNCTION and CALL Jan 3 2013 Statements e Corrected number of files shown in DIR listing e Corrected FONTS and SCHEMES listings color value display e Corrected label screen object text alignment to agree with scheme font alignment e Added ability to add text label to icon screen object e Added DRAW ARC and DRAW ARC STYLED commands Internal e Added DRAW LINE DASHED and DRAW BOX DASHED command Test e Added SORT command Version e Added INCLUDE command e Changed TEXTWIDTH and TEXTHEIGHT to TEXT WIDTH and TEXT HEIGHT e Changed HEXVAL and HEXSTR to HEX VAL and HEX STR e Added BITMAP WIDTH and BITMAP HEIGHT e Added CAPTURE and PWM system variables and events e Added RESO
48. TRANSP n m Where Field Description n Schemes table entry m see following table Where m Operation Transparency Color Value Description 0 Magic Value Magic index For indexed BMP images only the last index value is the magic color 1 None Not used Surface pixel image pixel 2 Darken scheme white replacecolor to Surface pixel surface pixel RGB565 color used as a multiplier 3 Source Color Filter Not used Surface pixel surface pixel image pixel 5 6 5 channel by channel multiply 4 Source Alpha Mask Scheme white replace color to be used as a white replacement Surface pixel surface pixel RG565 color 1 image pixel surface pixel treats image as an alpha mask white solid black transparent intermediate blended 5 Fill Scheme white replace fill color Surface pixel RGB565 color 6 Transparency Blend Scheme white replace color to use as an Alpha multiplier Surface pixel RGB565 color image pixel 1 RGB565 color surface pixel blends image into surface by ratio determined by RGB565 color 7 Shadow Scheme white replace color to use as an Alpha multiplier Surface pixel RGB565 color image pixel surface pixel 1 image pixel surface pixel image is mask to apply multiplication of RGB565 color Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 93 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
49. User s Manual Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 12 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Communicating with the Color LCD There are several options for communicating with the Color LCD These are listed in order of decreasing preference with the last two somewhat limiting your ability to program the display Serial Connection via RS 232 This requires either a stand alone ANSI terminal device or a PC running an ANSI terminal emulator program The connection is made between the Color LCD and the terminal device using a cable between the SERIAL connector and the communications port on the terminal or PC The PC communication port can be built in or provided with an external USB Serial Adaptor See the Color 320x240 LCD Display Terminal User s Guide appendix Wiring Harness Diagram Serial Connection via USB This requires a PC running an ANSI terminal emulator program The LCD display can be connected as a USB serial communications device A Micro B USB DEVICE connector is provided and the display can be connected to a PC with a USB A to Micro B cable A ColorLCD inf file is available that identifies the Color LCD as a virtual serial port device that implements the Communications Device Class A Linux USB CDC configuration file is also available WARNING Do not install the USB POWER jumper if powering the display through the SERIAL connector or external Ethernet power inje
50. Value 8 Maximum Offset 9 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 112 8 September 2014 Button Screen Object option function 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Back Button Screen Object option function 0 CO NID MN BY GQ Ro rR Label Screen Object option function o oo 1 oO t W W oO ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual Touch Keypad Screen Object option function 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Linear Gauge Screen Object option function 0 Needle Length 1 Needle Zero 2 Needle Width Needle Horizontal Alignment 0 Left 1 Center 2 Right Needle Vertical Alignment 0 Bottom 1 Middle 2 Minimum Angle Minimum Value Maximum Angle Maximum Value CO NI DIN Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 113 8 September 2014 Radial Gauge Screen Object option function 0 Needle Length 1 Needle Zero 2 Needle Width Needle Horizontal Alignment 3 0 Left Center 2 Right Needle Vertical Alignment 4 0 Bottom 1 Middle 2 5 Minimum Angle 6 Minimum Value 7 Maximum Angl
51. are syntax errors in the program or references to non existent line numbers the RESQ will error and stop The original program should be SAVEd before attempting to re sequence it e No checks are made to avoid overlapping line numbers and the generated RSQ file should be loaded viewed and run before saving it over the original program file list 10 ON N GOTO 100 150 200 20 GOSUB 250 30 GOTO 30 100 REM 150 REM 200 STOP 250 RETURN Ready resq Writing resequenced program to test2 RSQ 10 ON N GOTO 25 30 35 15 GOSUB 40 20 GOTO 20 25 REM 30 REM 35 STOP 40 RETURN RUN line RUN path Direct mode only Executes the program starting at the lowest or optional line number If path is present LOADs and RUNS a file directly at the lowest line number e fnot present the BAS file extension on the filename at the end of the path is added SAVE path Direct mode only Saves the current program to a disk file on the SD card with the filename specified in path or to the filename in the previous LOAD SAVE or RUN command if not specified e fnot present the BAS file extension on the filename at the end of the path is added e Ifthe provided name doesn t match the previous LOAD SAVE or RUN filename and the file already exists an overwrite warning message is displayed requiring approval Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 144 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manua
52. bas 20 ANSI ENABLE False BACKLIGHT True 25 CONST Knob SCREEN OBJ TYPE 0 Knob SpinnerKnob 30 SCREEN OBJ IMAGE Knob Knob_150x150 bmp SCREEN OBJ OVERLAY Knob Spinner_33x33 bmp 35 SCREEN OBJ X Knob ScreenWidth 2 150 2 SCREEN OBJ Y Knob ScreenHeight 2 150 2 40 SCREEN OBJ OPTION Knob MinValue SCREEN OBJ OPTION Knob MinAngle 225 45 SCREEN OBJ OPTION Knob MaxValue 100 SCREEN OBJ OPTION Knob MaxAngle 45 50 CONST Readout 1 SCREEN OBJ TYPE Readout Label 52 SCREEN OBJ X Readout 160 25 SCREEN OBJ Y Readout 220 55 SCREEN OBJ WIDTH Readout 50 SCREEN OBJ HEIGHT Readout 20 60 SCREEN OBJ MASK Knob ValueChanged SCREEN OBJ MASK Readout None 65 ONEVENT SCREEN OBJ EVENT GOSUB 10000 100 SCREENS CHANGETO 110 WAIT SCREEN EVENT 115 SCREEN OBJ VALUE Knob e 120 GOTO 120 10000 REM screen object event handler 10005 SCREEN OBJ TEXT Readout STR SCREEN OBJ VALUE Knob 10010 RETURN In order to make the program easier to follow it includes a file constants bas that defines several constant variables CONST False 0 True 1 CONST ScreenWidth 320 ScreenHeight 240 REM Screen Object Types CONST None 0 Icon 1 Button 2 ToggleButton 3 BackButton 4 Slider z5 Label 6 TouchKeypad 7 RadialGauge 8 CONST LinearGauge 9 Listbox 10 SpinnerKnob 11 Textbox 12 REM Alignment and Transparencies CONST Le
53. bit integer which is its return value So let s use this to draw a red pixel draw pixel 160 120 rgb 255 0 0 Kind of hard to see the individual pixels are kind of small and there s a lot of clutter on the screen Let s use another system variable to stop showing the program text and PRINT output on the small screen they will still show on your connected communications device The ANSI operating mode can be turned off by setting the ANSI ENABLE system variable to zero 5 0 Now as you type or PRINT the output doesn t affect the Color LCD screen As a default so nobody wonders where their PRINT output error message or Ready prompt went the 9 ANSLENABLE is set to one whenever a program is run or stops running So if you don t want ANSI output on the Color LCD screen while your program is running you will have to turn it off at the beginning of your program and keep your program running Clearing The Screen One last thing how do we clear the screen so we can see the pixel Turns out that there s a command for that to in computer terminology this is referred to a filling the screen Here s the command format DRAW FILL x y width height color X screen x coordinate 0 319 Sets the width by height pixels y screen y coordinate 0 240 starting at x y on the current width number of pixels wide to fill drawing SURFACE to color height number of pixels high to fill color RGB56
54. character we just have to the single 7 bit number to be sent to the display This means we need a function that takes in a decimal number and converts it to a single number representing the string character based upon this ASCII standard ACS Basic has just such a function built in The CHR function takes a decimal number argument and returns a single character string where the character is the ASCII character of the decimal number This character can then be sent to the display by PRINTing it Let s try it PRINT CHR 65 A Ready PRINT CHR 48 e Ready So how do we display characters that aren t in the ASCII standard It turns out that there is another standard call Unicode which defines how to combine multiple non ASCII codes into a single extended character Remember that ASCII only defines 7 bit codes 0 127 Since computers work with 8 bit codes 0 255 that leaves codes 128 255 available However the Unicode designers didn t want to limit themselves to just 128 more characters multiple languages required many more So they came up with an expandable scheme using multiple prefix characters that can be combined and decoded to represent many more extended characters Sounds complicated and it can be if you have to do the encoding and decoding However the Color LCD only provides display support for what is known as the DOS United States character set There is a table of these supported characters at
55. condition line 2 44 PRINT if condition line 3 50 ELSE 60 PRINT else condition line 1 62 PRINT else condition line 2 64 PRINT else condition line 3 70 ENDIF INPUT var Get value for variable from the serial port INPUT prompt var Get value of variable from the serial port with prompt Prompt may be a constant string or you can use a string variable in the prompt by concatenating it to a string INPUT A B INPUT N var Get value for variable from file or internet socket handle N 0 9 Note that when an end of file occurs the variable will have its last value Test the FEOF N system variable to detect this condition when inputting from a file LET var expr default statement Program or Direct mode Sets variable expression This is the default statement so the LET keyword is not required An attempt to assign a string value to a numeric variable or a numeric value to a string variable will generate a Type Error Some examples LET a0 240 100 Z9 Test TIMER 240 LIF test THEN statement statement Program mode only Long IF all statements to end of line The expression fest is evaluated and if non zero all statements to the end of the current program line are executed 20 LIF CLOSURE 24 1 THEN PRINT 25 closed GOSUB 100 CLOSURE 24 0 30 GOTO 20 Multiple conditions can be tested at the same time by combining two or more fest expressions with
56. different angles REM DRAW FILL demo ANSI ENABLE BACKLIGHT 1 DRAW FILL 0 0 319 239 RGB 192 192 192 RGB 64 64 64 90 DRAW FILL 16 90 60 60 RGB 255 0 0 RGB 0 255 0 0 DRAW FILL 92 90 60 60 RGB 255 0 0 RGB 0 255 0 90 DRAW FILL 168 90 60 60 RGB 255 0 0 RGB 0 255 0 180 DRAW FILL 244 90 60 60 RGB 255 0 0 RGB 0 255 0 270 GOTO 50 And the resulting screen display DRAW LINE startX startY endX endY color Draws a line of color from startX start Y to endX endY DRAW LINE DASHED startX startY endX endY color pattern scale Draws a dashed line of color from startX startY to endX endY Each bit in the pattern is used scale times to draw the pixels in the line a pattern of 21845 hex 5555 binary 0101010101010101 with a scale of 4 would draw 4 pixel dashes 4 pixels apart Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 158 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 DRAW ARC x y width height startDegrees endDegrees color Draws an arc centered at x y of width and height through angle startDegrees to endDegrees using color DRAW ARC STYLED x y width height startDegrees endDegrees color style Draws an arc centered at x y of width and height through angle startDegrees to endDegrees using color styled by the following style bits zero degrees is right and angle advances counter clockwise Where Style Bit
57. end of the path is assumed load programi Ready list 10 PRINT Program 1 A 20 1 30 LOAD program2 Ready load program2 Ready list 10 PRINT Program 2 A a a a 1 LOAD program1 Ready run Program 2 A Program 1 A Program 2 A Program 1 A ESC at line Ready MD path Direct mode only requires a SD card Makes a new directory on the SD card Path must be a complete path for the new directory and it must not already exist Path may be a constant string or you can use a string variable as the path by concatenating it to such a string MD PATHS MEMORY Displays the currently available program memory resource memory and SD card memory if a SD card is present memory SD card bytes free 7 929 724 928 Resource bytes free 23 938 413 Program bytes free 8 385 960 Ready Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 138 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 NEW Direct mode only Erases all program statements clears all variable values and closes all open files ON expr GOSUB linel line2 lineN Program mode only Case statement dispatching via subroutines The value of expr is evaluated and a subroutine call is performed to the line0 statement if it evaluates to zero linel if one etc If the value of expr is negative or greater than the number of line numbers present execution continues with the next statement A line num
58. esee 160 DRAW POLYGON y n color eese eene enne enne enne enne 161 DRAW POLYGON FILLED y n color eese eene 161 DRAW TEXT font x y eene eee o tenen tenete entente inne 162 DRAW BITMAP x y eere eene nnne enne 163 DRAW BITMAP INDEXED index x y imageResourceName esee 163 DRAW BITMAP TRANSP mode color x y imageResourceName ees 163 SCHEMES eir ERR tee ed RII 165 SCHEMES INID deci eddie e Ge eigene ede eed 165 SCHEMES LIST N start end SCHEMES LIST start endj sess 165 SCHEMES LOAD filename schemes eese eese seen ener nnne enne 165 SCHEMES SAVE filename schemes eee esee esee eene entente nennen 165 166 esie RR RE RR IERI EE 167 SCREENS LIST iion n an rise pn m a RB EE 167 SCREENS LOAD filename screens e 167 SCREENS SAVE filename screens eese eese ee eeeeee E nnne E enne nee 167 SCREENS CHANGETO screenNumber eese 167 SCREENS PUSHTO screenNumber eese esee eene nennen enter enne erinnere nnne enne 167 SCREENS POP ein ce er d o PR anode 167
59. file N 0 9 An optional path may be specified Wildcard characters 2 and may be used in the path with matching any single character and or matching multiple characters to show multiple files matching the pattern EDIT line Direct mode only Using an ANSI terminal allows editing a line by displaying the statement moving the cursor with the Home Left arrow Right arrow and End keys The Backspace key is used to delete characters to the left of the cursor Typed characters are entered at the cursor The Enter key accepts the changes a double ESC key aborts the edit END Program mode only Terminate program with no message Closes all open files ERROR value Force an error Program execution stops and an error message is displayed 10 ERROR 250 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 130 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Ready run 250 error in line 10 Ready FOR var init TO limit STEP increment statements NEXT var Program mode only Performs a counted loop incrementing var from the init expression value to the limit expression value by the optional increment expression value executing statements up until the matching NEXT statement The default value for the optional STEP increment is one When the NEXT statement is reached execution resumes with the matching FOR statement if the STEP increment of the control variable has not re
60. gt lt 9 gt lt 10 gt success listening connect lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 5 gt lt 6 gt lt 7 gt lt 8 gt lt 9 gt lt 10 gt success listening no connection listening lt lt lt ESC at line 1025 gt gt gt Ready Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 184 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Non blocking Client This is an example of a simple asynchronous or non blocking client It is connecting to a server on another device that essentially echoes back what it has received until the connection is terminated Line 20 establishes an event handler subroutine starting at line 1020 for SOCKET EVENTT 0 events Line 25 initializes the send data variables as well as a done flag variable and then calls the connection subroutine Lines 1000 1015 starts the non blocking connection and then returns Lines 30 35 execute a simple program loop that increments variable a while checking for the done flag variable to be set When done is set the program prints the current value of the incrementing variable a and then starts the connection again The SOCKET EVENT 0 handler subroutine in lines 1020 1055 print the result of the SOCKET ASYNC CONNECT statement and set the done flag variable The RUN shows the connections each interspersed with the incrementing variable a current value showing that program execution continues outside of the socket connection
61. i a to FWRITE to a record number that is past the immediate end 4 Length of data FWRITE variables list including commas and quotes 26 eror BE QE exceeds the recordlength specified in the associated FOPEN FINSERT record Out of Range error in line dd sear FINSERT to a record number that is past the immediate 5 Length of data in FINSERT variables list including commas and FINSER T exceeds tech error ine dd quotes exceeds the recordlength in the associated FOPEN gt Illegal use of systemvar in FOR DIM INPUT READ FREAD or Can t use VAR in line dd FINPUT statement Missing one of a pair of double quotes delimiting a string 38 FREAD record outofrange 39 Resourcenotfound PT 40 Resource already exists 41 Fontsouofmnge PT fonts fileinvali PT 43 Schemeifoutofrange PT _ schemes fileinvalid 245 Objfoutofrange 00 2 20 246 Seren amp outoframge 47 screens fileinvalid 4_ Configi outofrange _ 4 _ Config Item lt minor gt max 000000 50 DRAWPOLYGON Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 174 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 uSD Card File System po Read Only Attempt to write to a CONST variable 54 Option OutofRange 0 o 55
62. inputs that record capture events permissible values for x are 0 through 3 PWM PERIOD x PWM ONI x The PWM system variables allow the ACS Basic program to access the optional ACS COLOR LCD 52 1 Module to configure outputs to be pulse width modulated PWM Once configured the IO module will turn the contact output on and off for the on portion of the PWM period There are 4 contact outputs that can be individually programmed to generate different PWM signals permissible values for x are 0 through 3 The values are expressed with 1 millisecond resolution PWM PERIOD value of 100 is equal to 100 milliseconds or 10 hertz Setting the PWM ON value to 50 in this example would result in a 50 100 duty cycle of 50 of 50 milliseconds on followed by 50 milliseconds off A running PWM may be stopped by setting the PWM PERIOD to zero Setting the CONTACT x system variable to 1 for an output overrides the PWM operation for that output FILE SIZE N The FILE SIZE N read only system variable allows the ACS Basic program to determine the size in bytes of a previously opened file N FILE POSITION N The FILE POSITION N system variable allows the ACS Basic program to ascertain or set the position of the next file read or write operation of a previously opened file N Files opened in read only mode clip the set position to the size of the file Files opened in write only or update mode are extended if the p
63. into an array TIMER 10 _ values TIMER 4 2 So how do these timers work Fifty times per second the Color LCD checks these ten timers If of them are not equal to zero then the display subtracts one from it In computer terminology this is referred to as decrementing a non zero timer So you start the timer by setting it to a non zero value then you can monitor the timer by checking to see if it is at zero Since it counts down by 50 times per second to set the timer for one second you would set it to fifty Cool So how do we set a timer count for beats per minute We can calculate this given the counts per second and the seconds per minute to get the counts per beat 50 counts x 60 seconds second _ counts 3000 beats beats minute OK Divide 3000 by the desired beats per minute and use that to set the timer Then we can loop for the timer to be zero for our delay As for validating the user input we can t divide by zero it s an error so we have to be greater than that and dividing 3000 by anything larger than 3000 will result in a zero timer won t run at all Reasonable numbers are probably greater than 30 bpm and less than 300 bpm Let s change the program 10 REM Metronome 15 t INPUT Enter tempo beats per minute 30 300 tempo 20 IF tempo 30 OR tempo 300 THEN GOTO 15 25 TIMER
64. lt gt 3 lt gt 4 lt gt 5 lt gt 6 lt gt 7 lt gt 8 lt gt 9 lt gt 10 lt success a 6186 connecting connect gt 1 lt gt 2 lt gt 3 lt gt 4 lt gt 5 lt gt 6 lt gt 7 lt gt 8 lt gt 9 lt gt 10 lt success a 9280 connecting connect gt 1 lt gt 2 lt gt 3 lt gt 4 lt gt 5 lt gt 6 lt gt 7 lt gt 8 lt gt 9 lt gt 10 lt success a 12376 connecting connect gt 1 lt gt 2 lt gt 3 lt gt 4 lt gt 5 lt gt 6 lt gt 7 lt gt 8 lt gt 9 lt gt 10 lt success a 15471 connecting connect gt 1 lt gt 2 lt gt 3 lt gt 4 lt gt 5 lt gt 6 lt gt 7 lt gt 8 lt gt 9 lt gt 10 lt lt lt ESC at line 30 gt gt gt Ready Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 185 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Non blocking Server This is an example of a simple asynchronous non blocking server It listens for connections from client devices and essentially echoes back what it has received until the connection is terminated Line 20 establishes an event handler subroutine starting at line 1020 for SOCKET EVENT 0 events Line 25 initializes the send data variables as well as a done flag variable and then calls the connection subroutine Lines 1000 1015 starts the non blocking listening connection and then returns Lines 30 35 execute a simple program loop that increments variable a while checking for the done flag variable to be set When done is set the program pri
65. of the result The modulus operator divides the value to its left by the value on its right and returns the remainder When both values are equal or integer multiples the remainder of the division is zero This can be evaluated as x 96 y 2 x x y y Try computing the modulus of 4 for various values 09 4 0 0 4 4 0 1994 1 1 4 4 1 2 4 Q QM 4 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 59 4 5 5 4 4 1 6 4 6 6 4 4 You can see that the modulus ranges from zero when the arguments are equal to one less than the modulus So taking the modulus 360 of the angle computation returns an angle between 0 and 359 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 68 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 angle 360 90 second 6 360 If you now change lines 90 and 150 to count seconds from 0 to 59 and add line 95 to compute the angle you will see the motion being driven counter clockwise in 6 degree increments as the seconds range from 0 to 59 Rules for Making Things Move 1 To avoid flickering when moving graphics by DRAWing use the double buffering sequence 2 You compute the X and Y coordinates for DRAWing circular motion using the trig functions SIN and COS and scale the results using the MULDIV function 3 Incrementing angles rotate counter clockwise decrementin
66. put it in the drawer or retrieve an existing file from the drawer You can t retrieve a file that hasn t been created first The Color LCD will keep a directory listing of what files are in the drawer on the micro SD card Let s try it Put a fresh card into the slot and ask for a directory of files Type DIR On a fresh card you should see the following 0 files 0 directories The display is showing you that there are currently no files on the card Now type in one of your earlier programs remember to start with NEW Let s start with the simple FOR NEXT program 10 FOR A 1 TO 10 20 PRINT A 30 NEXT A You can RUN it to verify that it works as before Now let s SAVE it in a file Let s call it FORNEXT Type SAVE FORNEXT Did it save it Let s ask for a directory again DIR FORNEXT BAS 02 26 2012 04 57 02 PM 1 files 0 directories There it is The display is telling us that it s 43 characters long it was created on 2 26 2012 at 4 57PM and that there is one file on the card What s the BAS on the end of the file name There can be many types of files in the drawer on the card and this 1s Basic s way of telling us that this file is a Basic program Great Now let s try to get it back First clear out the program and variables with NEW Try a LIST and VARS to see that there s actually nothing in memory Now let s retrieve it Type LOAD FORNEXT Ere and then LIST it LOA
67. return The source string is not directly modified by the function REPLACES function takes three arguments Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 41 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 The STR function takes a single numeric argument and returns a string representation of that number Some Funny Characters Your communications device whether it is a PC or PS 2 keyboard or even the pop up touch keypad has a limited set of characters Your program may require some special characters or symbols be displayed like a degree symbol after a temperature for example The Color LCD can display these characters that don t appear on the keyboard but it takes a couple tricks The first trick is the understanding that each displayed character is actually based upon a number Back in the 60 s a standards committee got together and hashed out a definition of what number represents what character It started with the old telegraphic codes for characters and evolved to support the newly designed teleprinters In computer terminology this is called A S C I I which is the abbreviation for American Standard Code for Information Interchange It defines 128 characters and control codes each of which can be uniquely represented by a seven bit number There s a chart of these numbers and their representative characters at http www asciitable com Now when we want to show a certain
68. run test 1 2 3 STOP in line 112 Ready vars test r w IntFunction 1 gt Int arg2 r w Int arg3 r w Int Ready test test 6 line 100 1 2 3 In the prior example in lines 15 and 20 we are calling the test function and then PRINTing its value This can be combined into a single step by calling the function with arguments from the PRINT statement list 10 REM integer function 15 PRINT test 1 2 3 20 PRINT test 4 5 6 25 END 100 FUNCTION test argi arg2 arg3 105 PRINT test argi1 arg2 arg3 110 test argil arg2 arg3 115 ENDFUNCTION Ready run test 1 2 3 6 test 4 5 6 15 Ready Here s an example of a similar string function named test that takes three string arguments and concatenates them together with the result returned by assignment to the function name 10 REM string function 15 PRINT test one two three 20 PRINT test four five six 25 END 100 FUNCTION test arg1 arg2 arg3 105 PRINT test arg1 arg2 arg3 110 test arg1 arg2 arg3 115 ENDFUNCTION Ready run test one two three onetwothree test four five six fourfivesix Ready The following example is a string function named test that takes a mixed string integer parameter list the first parameter named in passes in the string value and the second parameter named howmany tells the function how many times to conc
69. run out of line numbers What you have now is a box drawing routine Suppose you could just call this routine whenever you wanted to draw a box Good News You can There is a routine calling command in most computer languages including ACS Basic In computer terminology these common routines are referred to as subroutines So how do you get to this part of your program from somewhere else And how do you get back The new command pair is GOSUB RETURN And they are a pair you can t have one without the other The computer terminology is calling into a subroutine and returning from a subroutine call in and return back right after where you called from Let s add some additional lines to the program 10 print Here s box 20 gosub 10000 30 print here s another 40 gosub 10000 50 And don t forget the last line that will turn box drawing lines into a subroutine 10080 return Your program should now look like this list 10 PRINT Here s box 20 GOSUB 10000 30 PRINT and here s another 40 GOSUB 10000 50 END 10000 REM Draw a box using ANSI characters 10005 PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 CHR 140 10010 FOR I 1 TO 10 10015 PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 CHR 128 10020 NEXT I 10025 PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 CHR 144 10030 PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 CHR 130 10035 FOR I 1 TO 10 10040 PRINT 10045 NEXT I 10050 PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 CHR 130 10055 PRINT C
70. scans the event table looking for flagged entries When a flagged entry is found the display performs the GOSUB to the recorded event handler line number When the event handler subroutine returns the display clears the flagged entry 10 Q SECOND GOSUB 10000 amp Setup SECOND event handler 20 IF A lt 5 THENA A 1 30 PRINT A 40 FORN 0TOA 50B B A 60 NEXT N soDueuo aNOO3SO 10000 REM Event Handler 10010 5 SECOND 10020 RETURN Events are prioritized an executing event handler can only be interrupted by a higher priority event Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 69 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 It is important to remember that all variables are shared between all parts of your program If your program is performing some long calculation using a variable and you change that variable in an event handler your program may get confused or generate incorrect results since the event handler can potentially execute anywhere in your program after it is configured So let s add event processing to our second hand program There is a system variable SECOND that is updated once a second from the Color LCD Real Time Clock hardware It signals an event when this happens We will turn the program lines 95 160 into a SECOND event handler Edit line 95 to change the second to the SECOND system variable in the angle calcula
71. statements ELSE statements ENDIF Program mode only Conditional execution block jump There must be no statements on the same line following the THEN ELSE and ENDIF keywords The expression fest 1s evaluated and if non zero program execution continues with the following statements If the test expression evaluates to zero program execution continues at the statements following the ENDIF If the optional ELSE clause is present and the fest expression evaluates to zero program execution continues at the statements following the ELSE up until the ENDIF is executed e the conditional block IF THEN ENDIF uses the control stack to execute you should not jump out of or into either code block of statements To leave the block IF statement GOTO the ENDIF statement A BREAK statement be used to exit a FOR NEXT or WHILE WEND loop from within a block IF statement e A CONTINUE statement can be used to continue a FOR NEXT or WHILE WEND loop from within a block IF statement Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 136 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 A RETURN statement can be used to return from a subroutine from within a block IF statement An IF THEN ENDIF statement example notice the use of extra spaces to indent the statement blocks to improve readability 10 REM block if 20 a 0 30 IF a 1 THEN 40 PRINT if condition line 1 42 PRINT if
72. system variables and the Events section below for more information TIMERI x The TIMER x system variables allow the ACS Basic program to measure or control time intervals There are ten timers permissible values for x are 0 through 9 Setting the variable to a non zero value activates the timer The value in the timer variable is decremented every 20mSEC 50 Hz until it reaches zero Upon reaching zero any associated event handler specified with the ONEVENT statement is activated CONTACTI x The 9 CONTACTIx system variables allow the ACS Basic program to access the optional ACS COLOR LCD PS2 IO Module contacts The module must be installed and the PS 2 Enable configuration must be set to true There are 4 contact inputs and 4 contact outputs permissible values for x are 0 through 3 Setting the variable to a 1 activates output contact x Reading the variable returns the value from the input contact x CLOSURE x The CLOSURE x system variables allow the ACS Basic program to access the optional ACS COLOR LCD PS2 IO Module contact events The module must be installed and the PS 2 Enable configuration must be set to true There are 4 contact inputs permissible values for x are 0 through 3 Reading the variable returns a 1 if the input contact x has had a closure since last being read Closures are sticky and the program must clear the closure by assigning it a zero before it can be det
73. takes a string argument and returns the numeric value of the first character The numeric value is the decimal representation of the character s ASCII value an agreed upon world wide standard see http www asciitable com Let s try it PRINT ASC A 65 Ready PRINT ASC 0 48 Ready The ABS function takes a number argument and returns it s ABSolute value if the numeric argument is positive or zero the same number is returned If the numeric argument is negative the positive value of the number is returned Let s try it PRINT ABS 2 2 Ready PRINT ABS 0 Ready PRINT ABS 3 3 Ready The COS function takes a number argument and returns it s COSine value interpreting the number as an angle in degrees Since the Color LCD ACS Basic only supports whole integer numbers the number that is returned is equal to the COSine of the angle times 1024 Let s try it Remember that the COSine of 0 degrees should be 1 0 the COSine of 45 degrees should be 0 707 and the COSine of 90 degrees should be 0 0 the results are multiplied by 1024 to allow integer manipulation PRINT COS 1024 Ready PRINT 05 45 724 Ready PRINT 05 90 0 Ready The ERR function takes no argument and returns the number of the last error that Basic encountered This will be useful later on when you want your programs to be able to handle some errors without stopping There is a table of error number in the ACS Bas
74. that can take a variable number of coordinates The answer is to use an array of numbers to store each coordinate and just provide the array names to the polygon command Array variables are just a table of numbers or strings In order to use an array you have to tell Basic how big of a table that you want The Color LCD then sets aside the correct amount of memory for that variable to hold the number of values that you require In computer terminology this is referred to as dimensioning an array Basic provides a DIMension command for this purpose 30 DIM x 3 y 3 When you access the individual values in this array you specify an index into the table to select which value that you want The index follows the variable name and is enclosed in brackets Here s a conceptual picture of what a 5 element numeric array looks like Notice that there are 5 elements numbered 0 4 values DIM Variable 5 Variable 2 WNr 4 Since each array variable holds a single set of values to draw a polygon you will need two arrays one for the X coordinates of each vertex and one for the Y coordinates Your program fills these arrays with the coordinates for each point prior to calling the DRAW POLYGON command The command looks at the dimensioned size of these coordinate arrays to determine how many sides and vertices that the polygon should be drawn with So let s draw a 3 sided polygon a tri
75. that you wanted above you could write PRINT 2 3 2 10 Ready So when in doubt or when you really want things done in a certain order use parenthesis to group operations together The display will evaluate things from the inside out starting with the most nested set of parenthesis first Numeric Operator Rules 1 Numbers be added subtracted multiplied divided remaindered negated and compared 2 Multiple operations can be performed sequentially to form a numeric expression 3 Multiple operations are performed in a priority fashion from first to last negation multiplication and division addition and subtraction then comparison 4 Multiple operations with the same priority are performed left to right 5 Parenthesis can be used to change the order in which numeric expressions are evaluated Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 34 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Things to do with Strings There are also operations that can be performed on strings The most common of these are to combine two separate strings into a new single string by adding one string onto the end of another In computer terminology this is referred to as concatenation the two strings are concatenated together PRINT HELP ME HELPME Ready 1 Help Ready Part2 Me Ready PRINT Parti Part2 Help Me Ready Comparing Strings
76. the logical AND OR operators 20 LIF A 0 AND CLOSURE 24 1 THEN PRINT 25 closed GOSUB 10 CLOSURE 24 0 30 GOTO 20 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 137 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 LIST start end LIST start end Direct mode only List program lines to the serial port May also specify a starting and ending line number to limit the range of lines that are displayed A double escape sequence will stop the portion of the file that the CFSound not already queued for output LIST N start end LIST N start end Direct mode only List program lines to open file N 0 9 May also specify a starting and ending line number to limit the range of lines that are displayed A double escape sequence will stop the portion of the file that the CFSound not already written LOAD path Program or Direct mode Load an ACS Basic program from a SD card file specified by path The full path to the program file must be specified and must not start with a leading backslash e When LOAD is used within a program execution continues with the first line of the newly loaded program In this case the user variables are not cleared This provides a means of chaining to a new program and passing information to it e When used in a program note that LOAD must be the last statement on a line If not present the BAS file extension on the filename at the
77. the end of this manual To display them you just have to send the multiple character sequence underneath the character The definition of what values represent what extended characters were also defined starting 1n the 60 s and is loosely known as the ANSI code standard ANSI stands for American National Standards Institute So let s try showing that degree character From the table it looks like the two codes are 194 and 176 remember to separate the two function calls with a semicolon if you use a comma instead it won t work because a space character 32 will get inserted between them print chr 194 chr 176 o Ready And there it is You can try some others from the table some take two codes and some three Using Basic PRINT commands to display characters is referred to as ANSI operation Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 42 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Don t Get Boxed In If you look at the Extended Characters table at the end of the manual there are some that can be used for line drawing Let s try and draw a simple box We need the four corners the lines across the top and bottom and the lines on the side Try typing this short program in don t forget to NEW first REM Draw a box using ANSI characters PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 CHR 140 FOR I 1 TO 10 PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 CHR 128 NEXT I PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 CHR 144
78. the numeric value of the hexadecimal string var variable PRINT HEX VAL AAAA 43690 Ready INSERT var start var2 Returns a string variable with the contents of variable2 inserted at zero based position start 10 REM test insert 20 s ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 30 i insert 35 REM insert at beginning 40 PRINT INSERT s 0 i 45 REM insert in middle 50 PRINT INSERT s 13 i 55 REM insert past end 60 PRINT INSERT s 30 i Ready run insertABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ ABCDEFGHIJKLMinsertNOPQRSTUVWXYZ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZinsert Ready LEFT var len Returns a string containing the leftmost length characters of string variable TEST This is a string PRINT LEFT TEST 5 This LEN var Returns the length number of characters of string variable TEST This is a string PRINT LEN TEST 16 MID var start len Returns a string consisting of length number of characters of string variable from zero based start character position TEST This is a string PRINT MID TEST 5 4 is a MULDIV number multiplier divisor Returns a 32 bit result of number multiplier divisor where number multiplier and divisor are 64 bit internally Useful for calculating percentages etc where the normal multiply would overflow a signed 32 bit number 10 REM calculate 55 percent of 999 20 PRINT MULDIV 999 55 100 MULMOD 999 55 100 Ready run 549 45 Copyr
79. top of it 11 Toggle the Work and Display surfaces 12 Repeat from step 4 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 156 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 DRAW INIT Initializes the drawing system clears the three drawing surfaces restores the ANSI system variables to their default values sets the current drawing SURFACE as DISPLAY DRAW COPY sourceSurface sX sY dX dY width height Copies the region located at sX sY of width and height from the specified source surface to the current drawing SURFACE at dX dY DRAW TRANSLA TE sourceSurface sX sY dX dY width height mode Translates the region located at sX sY of width and height from the source surface to the current drawing SURFACE at dX dY using mode Where mode Operation 0 No rotation Rotate 90 CCW 2 Rotate 180 CCW 3 Rotate 270 CCW 4 Flip horizontal 8 Flip vertical Here s a sample program that displays the time once per second and shows three copies of the seconds portion each rotated by 90 degrees 10 REM demo draw translate 15 ANSI ENABLE ANSI CURSOR BACKLIGHT 1 20 REM configure font 25 FONT EFNT Fnt LiquidCrystal64 efnt FONT FCOLOR RGB 255 255 255 30 QFONT BTRANSP O 1 FONT HALIGN 1 QFONT VALIGN O 1 35 REM draw filled box on background 40 SURFACE 2 DRAW BOX FILLED 30 100
80. which stops without the message Try it by changing line 40 Program Rules A program consists of one or more command lines that begin with a line number Commands are not case sensitive but are converted by Basic Variables are case sensitive Program lines and variables may be cleared from memory by the NEW command Program lines are kept in ascending numeric order by the display A program is RUN to execute the lines in numeric order starting with the lowest numbered line Program lines may be shown with the LIST command The execution order of program lines may be changed by the GOTO command A program which is executing repeatedly in a loop may be ESCaped by pressing the fs key twice in a row 9 A program line may be replaced by typing a new program line with the same line number 10 A program line may be deleted by typing the line number only followed by 11 Program line execution may be conditioned by the IF THEN command 12 Program execution may be stopped with the STOP or END commands Q9 TOY A sco Eres Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 25 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Learning How to Count Most programs require the ability to count lines key presses characters loops or other things With the commands that you already know you can write a program that counts First we need to learn a fundamental concept In order to add to a variable yo
81. 0 ANSI ENABLE 0 BACKLIGHT 1 20 REM Draw grid 30 DRAW LINE 10 0 10 239 RGB 255 0 0 40 DRAW LINE 160 0 160 239 RGB 255 0 0 50 DRAW LINE 309 0 309 239 RGB 255 0 0 60 DRAW LINE 0 10 319 10 RGB 255 0 0 70 DRAW LINE 0 120 319 120 RGB 255 0 0 80 DRAW LINE 0 229 319 229 RGB 255 0 0 90 REM Draw aligned text 100 FONT HALIGN 0 0 FONT VALIGN 0 5 0 10 10 LEFT BOT 110 FONT HALIGN 0 1 FONT VALIGN 0 5 0 160 10 MID BOT 120 gFONT HALIGN 0 2 FONT VALIGN O0 0 0 309 10 RIGHT BOT 130 9gFONT HALIGN O0 0 9 FONT VALIGN 0 1 b 0 10 120 LEFT MID 140 FONT HALIGN 0 1 FONT VALIGN 1 a 0 160 120 MID MID 150 9FONT HALIGN 0 2 9 FONT VALIGN 0 1 0 309 120 RIGHT MID 160 9FONT HALIGN 0 0 9FONT VALIGN 0 2 0 10 229 LEFT TOP 170 FONT HALIGN 0 1 FONT VALIGN 2 0 160 229 MID TOP 180 FONT HALIGN 0 2 FONT VALIGN 2 E 0 309 229 RIGHT TOP 190 GOTO 190 FONT BTRANSP n This system variable sets the background transparency for Font table entry n FONT BTRANSP n b Where Field Description n Font table entry b 0 Solid 1 Transparent FONT FTRANSP n This system variable sets the foreground transparency for Font table entry n FONT FTRANSP n b Where Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 89 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual Field Description n Font table entry
82. 0 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 60 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual character background pixels and the FTRANS column controls the foreground pixels A value of 0 forces 8 September 2014 those pixels to be drawn a value of 1 forces those pixels to not be drawn All of these font table entries may be accessed read written using system variables specifying an index of the entry System Variable Values Description FONT EFNT entry resource efnt Gets Sets embedded font resource for entry the resource must exist in the resource table to set FONT BCOLOR entry RB565 pixel color Gets Sets font RGB to set background color for entry use FONT FCOLOR entry RB565 pixel color Gets Sets font RGB to set foreground color for entry use FONT SPACINGX entry 1 bounding box 0 fixed width 0 spacing Gets Sets font horizontal spacing FONT SPACINGY entry 1 bounding box fixed width spacing v 1 Gets Sets font not currently vertical spacing supported FONT HALIGN entry left justify center justify right justify Gets Sets font horizontal alignment FONT VALIGN entry top justify center justify bottom justify Gets Sets font vertical alignment FONT BTRANS entry normal transparent Gets Sets font background transparency
83. 014 ONEVENT systemvar GOSUB line Program mode only Provides semi asynchronous event handling via subroutines Certain ACS Basic system variables can trigger events The ONEVENT statement allows the event to be associated with the execution of a subroutine When the event occurs after execution of any current statement that does not transfer control control is transferred to the subroutine starting at line While in the event subroutine only higher priority events will be recognized until after the RETURN statement is executed An event handler can be disabled by specifying a line number of zero Executing the ONEVENT statement clears the associated event in preparation for the subsequent event handling The following system variables can cause events and are listed in order of decreasing priority The event occurs one time whenever the timer counts down to zero TIMER x System variable TIMER 0 is the highest priority followed by Q TIMER 1 then TIMER 9 0 lt x lt 9 CLOSURE zx The event occurs whenever a contact I O contact has closed 0 lt x lt 56 OPENING x The event occurs whenever a contact has opened 0 x lt 56 The event occurs after INPUT N FINPUT N or FREAD N reaches the end of file N 0 9 SECOND The event occurs once per second MINUTE The event occurs once per minute HOUR The event occurs once per hour
84. 123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ EOT Ready In this incorrect example program execution would lock forever on line 20 since all statements on the same line before the WAIT are executed continuously while waiting Since these statements reload the timer that the WAIT is waiting on the program will never execute past this line 5 REM Wrong use of the WAIT statement 10 PRINT start timer wait timer 20 QTIMER O 50 WAIT QTIMER O 30 PRINT done Ready run start timer wait timer ESC at line 20 Ready WHILE test statements WEND Program mode only Conditional execution code block loop The expression fest is evaluated and if non zero program execution continues with the following statements If the test expression evaluates to Zero program execution continues at the statements following the WEND WHILE WEND blocks can be nested and don t have to be the only statements on the line WHILE WEND blocks can be exited from within without the test expression evaluating to zero using the BREAK statement WHILE WEND blocks can be continued from within without executing all of the statements using the CONTINUE statement As the WHILE WEND code block loop uses the control stack to execute you should not jump out of or into the code block loop of statements To leave the loop force the test expression to return zero or use the BREAK statement Here are some examples 10 REM while wend test 15 WHILE a 10 PRI
85. 14 The Basic program can DRAW on the display surface after the screen constructed event has occurred Any drawing done on the display surface between the SCREEN navigation command and the screen constructed event would appear to be drawn on the work surface after step 3 above occurs Double buffer or ping pong drawing should not be performed as it will interfere with the Screen Framework s operation Screen object s VALUEs can be changed by the program to cause the object to change its appearance on the screen These changes should be made after the object s containing screen has been constructed as determined by the construction event Changes before the occurrence of the screen construction event may be overwritten or discarded until the screen and its objects have been constructed Using the screen framework and controls can simplify a Color Basic graphic application as the screens and objects manage the drawing surfaces and render themselves in response to system variable changes and user touch interaction Rules for the Screen Framework 1 Screen Framework is comprised of multiple system variable tables that specify what objects controls are located where on each screen and how they are displayed 2 The Screen Framework is started by the first SCREENS CHANGETO or SCREENS PUSHTO command 3 Screens are not stored fully rendered but are constructed drawn when navigated to 4 Screens and screen objects signal changes by
86. 20 PRINT What s your name 30 INPUT Name 40 PRINT Hi Name Ready Put line 50 back into your program Type 50 GOTO 40 Now let s change the way that the PRINT shows your name Replace line 40 in your program by typing it again but add a semicolon at the end 40 PRINT Hi Name Now RUN the program Notice how the trailing semicolon crams everything together Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 23 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 40 PRINT Hi Name LIST 10 PRINT Hello from the Color LCD 2 PRINT What s your name 30 INPUT Name 40 PRINT Hi Name 50 GOTO 40 Ready run Hello from the Color LCD What s your name Steve Hi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi SteveHi Ste ESC at line 40 Ready Controlling the Program Execution You ve seen that a program can be RUN from lowest line number to highest The program can als
87. 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 13 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Network ETHERNET ACS Color 320x24 Hub Switch ETHERNET Patch Cable Patch Optional T Power On 1 Cable The LCD display supports a configurable MAC address and configurable static IP address and IP mask Communication is performed using TCP IP Raw Sockets with a configurable port address Terminal Emulator Programs Your PC may have a terminal emulator program available Windows XP systems have a program called Hyperterminal installed It should be located at Start All Programs Accessories Communications Hyperterminal A slightly better version of this program Hyperterminal PE Private Edition is also available for purchase from Hilgraeve Hyperterm PE http www hilgraeve com hyperterminal The Hyperterminal PE edition can communicate with the Color LCD using your PC s serial or USB port or with TCP IP Raw Sockets The following terminal emulator programs are also available for free download Tera Term http ttssh2 sourceforge jp PuTTY http www chiark greenend org uk sgtatham putty PS 2 Keyboard This requires the optional ACS COLOR LCD PS2 IO adaptor installed onto the Color LCD EXP connector and that the display is powered from either the serial or Ethernet power injector This option uses the display dire
88. 290 180 RGB 255 0 0 SURFACE 1 45 REM init SECOND event handler 50 ONEVENT SECOND GOSUB 1005 55 GOTO 55 1000 SECOND event handler 1005 t FMT 2d HOUR FMT 2d MINUTE FMT 2d SECOND 1010 REM copy background to work draw current time on work 1015 DRAW COPY 2 30 100 30 100 260 150 DRAW TEXT 0 160 140 1 1020 REM translate and rotate seconds on work 1025 DRAW TRANSLATE 1 210 100 0 80 80 1 1030 DRAW TRANSLATE 1 210 100 120 0 80 80 2 1035 DRAW TRANSLATE 1 210 100 240 0 80 80 3 1040 REM toggle work and display 1045 DRAW TOGGLE 1050 RETURN And the resulting screen display Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 157 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 DRAW TOGGLE Toggles the DISPLAY and WORK drawing surfaces WORK becomes DISPLAY and DISPLAY becomes WORK This is useful for double buffer or ping pong drawing to minimize flickering DRAW PIXEL x y color Sets the display pixel at location x y on the current drawing SURFACE to color DRAW FILL x y width height color endcolor angle Fills the display starting at x y for width and height with color If endcolor and angle arguments are present fills as a gradient from color to endcolor at angle Angle can be 0 90 180 or 270 Here s a sample program that shows an overall gradient fill then smaller fills at the four
89. 4 Listbox Options NumberOfItems 0 TopItem 1 ItemHeight 2 Textbox Options Style 0 NumberOfChars 1 Textbox Styles NumbersOnly 1 Password 2 Lowercase 4 Uppercase 8 Readonly 16 Now that these constant variables are defined in the program they can be used instead of their numerical equivalents Program lines 30 40 configure screen zero screen object 0 to be a radial gauge type with the defined options The screen object s IMAGES is a previously loaded BMP resource The magenta background color will become transparent when this indexed bitmap is rendered Line 50 then starts the screen display system by changing to screen 0 Line 60 waits for the screen to be constructed Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 188 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Then lines 70 and 80 set the gauge s value from 0 to 100 and back 10 REM Test Guage Screen Object 15 INCLUDE Constants bas 20 ANSI ENABLE 0 BACKLIGHT 1 30 SCREEN OBJ TYPE 0 RadialGauge 31 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 0 IndicatorLength 80 32 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 0 0 IndicatorZero 20 33 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 0 IndicatorWidth 10 34 SCREEN OBJ OPTION HAlign Center 35 SCREEN OBJ OPTION VAlign Middle 36 9SCREEN OBJ OPTION 0 0 MinValue 0 37 SCREEN OBJ OPTION MinAngle 225 38 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 0 MaxValue 100 39 SCREEN OBJ OPTION MaxAngle 45 40 SCREEN 0BJ IMA
90. 5 fill pixels color So try it draw fill 0 0 320 240 RGB 0 0 0 You experiment with different positions widths heights and colors So now we have enough for a simple graphics program 10 REM Draw a red pixel at the center of the screen 15 ANSI ENABLE 0 20 DRAW FILL 0 0 320 240 RGB 0 0 0 25 DRAW PIXEL 160 120 RGB 255 0 0 30 GOTO 30 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 51 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual Drawing Lines 8 September 2014 How about drawing lines Let s try drawing a green line diagonally from one corner of the screen to the other Here s the command format DRAW LINE sx sy ex ey color 5 Draws a line from sx sy to ex sy ey on the current drawing ex SURFACE using color ey color starting x coordinate 319 starting coordinate 0 240 ending x coordinate 319 ending coordinate 240 RGB565 line pixels color Here s the program 1 REM Draw a green line from lower left to upper right 15 ANSI ENABLE 0 20 DRAW FILL 0 0 320 240 RGB 0 0 0 25 DRAW LINE 0 0 319 239 RGB 0 255 0 30 GOTO 30 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 52 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual Drawing Arcs 8 September 2014 How about drawing arcs You could compute and draw each pixel making up the arc or have ACS Basic draw it for you if yo
91. 55 100 Ready run 549 45 Ready Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 39 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 The RGB function takes in three numeric arguments representing three color components Red Green and Blue These are then converted into a 16 bit pixel color that is used for DRAWing on the display The RND function takes in a numeric argument and returns a random number that ranges from zero to the argument minus one The SIN function takes a number argument and returns it s SINe value interpreting the number as an angle in degrees Since the Color LCD ACS Basic only supports whole integer numbers the number that is returned is equal to the SINe of the angle times 1024 Let s try it Remember that the SINe of 0 degrees should be 0 0 the SINe of 45 degrees should be 0 707 and the SINe of 90 degrees should be 1 0 the results are multiplied by 1024 to allow integer manipulation PRINT SIN e Ready PRINT SIN 45 724 Ready PRINT SIN 90 1024 Ready The VAL function takes a string argument which it tries to interpret as a decimal value If it successfully converts the decimal string representation of a number to a value it returns that value otherwise it causes a Syntax error PRINT VAL 12345 12345 Ready PRINT VAL 35 35 Ready Functions Returning a String These functions take one or more arguments and return
92. 55 255 AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 0 0 AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 255 255 255 AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 0 0 0 AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 255 255 255 AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 0 0 0 AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 255 255 255 AcsDefaultFont efnt 5 RGB 0 0 0 AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 255 255 255 AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 0 0 0 AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 255 255 255 AcsDefaultFont efnt b RGB 0 0 0 AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 255 255 255 AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 0 e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e What are all of these numbers The first column is the font number the index into the font table In Basic you can treat this table as an array using an index to access individual rows The second column is the embedded font file name in the resources that will be used to render text using this font table entry Note that when setting the efnt resource to be used by an entry that entry has to exist in the resources if it doesn t an error will occur The next two columns indicate what Background color BCOLOR and Foreground color FCOLOR will be used when rendering the text The FCOLOR is the color of the actual character pixels the BCOLOR is the color of the pixels surrounding the character The values in the table are 16 bit RGB565 values they are shown in the listing as if they were set
93. 7 K 10160 RETURN 11000 DefaultItem REM Default a single configuration item 11005 IF fields THEN 11010 CONFIG VALUE item CONFIG DEFAULT item 11015 ELSE 11020 FOR field 0 TO fields 1 CONFIG VALUE item field CONFIG DEFAULT item field NEXT field 1 14 0 11025 ENDIF 11030 RETURN 12000 REM 12005 REM Show the menu 12010 REM 12015 ShowMenu PRINT PRINT Configuration Editor PRINT 12020 PRINT up down item default Enter edit save 12025 PRINT value left right field X exit 12030 PRINT Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 195 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 12035 RETURN 13000 REM 13005 REM update field if number entered 13010 REM 13015 UpdateField 13020 IF numberEdit THEN 13025 IF LEN number gt THEN number VAL number ELSE number IF number lt min number gt max THEN number max 13030 IF fields THEN CONFIG VALUE item field number ELSE CONFIG VALUE item 13035 numberEdit 0 number 13040 ENDIF 13045 IF hexEdit THEN 13050 IF LEN number gt THEN number HEX VAL number ELSE number 0 IF number number min IF number gt max THEN number max 13055 IF fields THEN CONFIG VALUE item field number ELSE CONFIG VALUE item 13060 hexEdit 0 number 13065 ENDIF 13070 RETURN Ready Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 196 8 September 2014 THEN number min
94. 8530 hexEdit 1 number CHR key 8535 ENDIF 8540 ENDIF 8545 REM A F keys 8550 IF key amp 223 65 AND key amp 223 70 THEN 8555 IF itemType 12 THEN 8560 hexEdit 1 IF LEN number lt 2 THEN number number CHR key amp 223 8565 ENDIF 8570 IF itemType 17 THEN 8575 hexEdit 1 number CHR key amp 223 8580 ENDIF 8585 ENDIF 8590 REM 8595 REM backspace key 8600 REM 8605 IF key 8 AND numberEdit 1 AND LEN number gt 0 THEN number LEFT number LEN number 1 8610 ENDIF 8615 RETURN 10000 REM 10005 REM Show the current configuration item 10010 REM 10015 ShowItem PRINT CHR 13 PRINT item PRINT 3 10020 PRINT CONFIG NAME item 10025 IF fields THEN 10030 IF editing THEN 10035 FOR f TO fields 1 10040 IF f field THEN PRINT CHR 27 7m 10045 IF numberEdit 1 OR hexEdit 1 AND f field THEN 10050 PRINT number 10055 ELSE 10060 PRINT CONFIG FIELD item f 10065 ENDIF 10070 IF f field THEN PRINT CHR 27 10075 PRINT CONFIG SEPARATOR item f 10080 NEXT f 10085 ELSE 10090 PRINT CONFIG VALUE item 10095 ENDIF 10100 ELSE 10105 IF editing THEN 10110 PRINT CHR 27 7m 10115 ENDIF 10120 IF numberEdit 1 OR hexEdit 1 THEN 10125 PRINT number 10130 ELSE 10135 PRINT QCONFIG VALUE item 10140 ENDIF 10145 PRINT CHR 27 m 10150 ENDIF 10155 PRINT CHR 2
95. 95feaed60455b987e168b4a279b33 com X SmarterMail TotalSpamWeight 0 Authenticated This is a test HTML e mail message sent from a file http www cfsound com SOCKET ASYNC CONNECT N ip port connect send recv Initiates an outgoing asynchronous network socket connection as file N using the string representation of the IPv4 IP address and port number If the socket opens without error execution continues with the following statement The status of the connection send receive and disconnect process is returned via the SOCKET EVENTT N system variable The connect user function is called when a connection is established The send user function is called to send data to the connected device using PRINT N or FPRINT N statement s Return zero to terminate the connection one to proceed to the recv function and two to be called again to send more data The recv user function is then called to receive data from the connected device using INPUT N or FINPUT N statements s Return zero to terminate the connection one to return to the send function and two to be called again to receive more data See the Socket Programming section below for more information and sample programs SOCKET ASYNC LISTEN N port connect recv send Initiates an incoming asynchronous network socket reception as file N using the string representation of the IPv4 port number If the socket opens without error ex
96. ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming User s Manual 8 September 2014 bn On ue Cure Edge of Technological Evolution Ackerman Computer Sciences ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Table of Contents Welc me Newbies 11 And Hello Programimers ode epp edes e Re Ar eaa TEETAR 11 Po Get Started RAL SA ein chs OR Shs 11 Powering the Color LGD 5 oracio eee E e rere HR RR D EP prier eres 11 Via SERIAL Connector with ACS Power 11 Via USB DEVICE Connector with USB Cable sese 12 Via ETHERNET Connector with Power Over Ethernet esee 12 Communicating with the Color 402222040401 0 0 nennen 13 Serial Connection vid RS 232 sas t 13 Serial Connection VIG OSB irk oue e ee tei yere spar whe 13 TCP IP Raw Connection via Ethernet eese esee eee entente entente enne enne nee 13 Terminal Emulator Programs eese enne enne nennen rnnt 14 2 odes Dos re ee 14 Pop up K yp d noo oit ern Hr RR 14 Configuring the Color LCD Display 14 Color
97. AW TEXT at the grid intersection points with the various font alignment options to show how they affect the text rendering 5 REM Test font HALIGN and VALIGN 10 ANSI ENABLE 0 20 REM Draw grid 30 DRAW LINE 10 0 10 239 RGB 255 0 0 40 DRAW LINE 160 0 160 239 RGB 255 0 0 50 DRAW LINE 309 0 309 239 RGB 255 0 0 60 DRAW LINE 0 10 319 10 RGB 255 0 0 70 DRAW LINE 0 120 319 120 RGB 255 0 0 80 DRAW LINE 0 229 319 229 RGB 255 0 0 90 REM Draw aligned text 100 QgFONT HALIGN O0 0 9 FONT VALIGN O0 0 5 0 10 10 LEFT BOT 110 QgFONT HALIGN 0 1 9FONT VALIGN O0 0O 0 160 10 MID BOT 120 9FONT HALIGN 0 2 9 FONT VALIGN 0 0O 0 309 10 RIGHT BOT 130 Q9gFONT HALIGN O0 0 Q9FONT VALIGN 0 1 5 0 10 120 LEFT MID 140 9gFONT HALIGN O0 1 Q9FONT VALIGN 0 1 0 160 120 MID MID 150 9gFONT HALIGN 0 2 FONT VALIGN 0 1 0 309 120 RIGHT MID 160 9gFONT HALIGN 0 0 9FONT VALIGN O0 2 0 10 229 LEFT TOP 170 FONT HALIGN 0 1 FONT VALIGN 2 0 160 229 180 FONT HALIGN 2 FONT VALIGN 2 0 309 229 RIGHT TOP 190 GOTO 190 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 62 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Drawing Images Using all of the DRAWing command you can construct pretty line art displays But how do we draw images like photos or Photoshop generated graphics There is a DRAW BITMAP command that will allow yo
98. ButtonK2 bmp 2 050 builtin ButtonK4 bmp 3 018 builtin ButtonM bmp 2 618 builtin Ready There are a few resources that are built in they are required to allow the status display Configuration Settings screen and other features to operate if no additional resources can be found The files with the EFNT extension are embedded font files They contain the information about the size and shape of the text characters for drawing purposes The AcsAnsiFont efnt file is used for PRINTing ANSI text the AcsDefaultFont efnt is used for displaying the power up status messages and labeling the keys on the Configuration Settings keypad There is a Windows utility that can be used to generate these embedded font files from existing computer font files you select the computer font what size to make it what characters to include in the font and what name to give the generated EFNT and the utility generates the file This is described in an Appendix of the Color LCD 320x240 Display Terminal User s Manual How do you get your embedded font files into the Color LCD resources You can then place the embedded font file on the micro SD card and load it into the resources manually or in your program using the RESOURCES ADD command resources add ComicSansBold14 efnt Ready resources list ComicSansBold14 efnt 25 666 AcsAnsiFont efnt 12 604 builtin AcsDefaultFont efnt 27 940 builtin ButtonK bmp 1 610 builtin ButtonK2 bmp 2 050 builtin Butto
99. CONNECT function continues If there isn t a match the recv function returns the zero value and the SOCKET SYNC CONNECT function exits 10 REM test synchronous ip connect 15 senddata recvdata GOSUB 1000 GOTO 15 1000 REM connection subroutine 1002 PRINT connecting 1005 0 192 168 1 205 1000 connect send recv GOTO unknown ok no open connect send err recv err 1010 RETURN 1012 unknown PRINT unknown RETURN ok PRINT success RETURN no open PRINT can t open RETURN no connect PRINT no connection RETURN send err PRINT send error RETURN err PRINT recv error RETURN REM connect function FUNCTION connect PRINT connect ENDFUNCTION REM send function FUNCTION send send 0 LIF lt 10 THEN senddata STR RND 32767 n n 1 FPRINT 0 n senddata PRINT 5 n send 1 ENDFUNCTION REM recv function FUNCTION recv FINPUT 0 recvdata LIF recvdata senddata THEN PRINT lt 1 ENDFUNCTION connecting connect gt 1 lt gt 2 lt gt 3 lt gt 4 lt gt 5 lt gt 6 lt gt 7 lt gt 8 lt gt 9 lt gt 10 lt success connecting connect gt 1 lt gt 2 lt gt 3 lt gt 4 lt gt 5 lt gt 6 lt gt 7 lt gt 8 lt gt 9 lt gt 10 lt success connecting connect gt 1 lt gt 2 lt gt 3 lt gt 4 lt gt 5 lt gt 6 lt gt 7 lt gt 8 lt g
100. Calendar Writing one of these variables except SECOND stops the clock and updates the associated value Writing to the SECOND variable updates the value and starts the clock running The values of these variables are updated once per second Whenever one of the values of these variables changes any associated event handler specified with the ONEVENT statement is activated See the Setting the Real Time Clock sample program in the Examples section for more information SECOND 00 lt seconds lt 59 MINUTE 00 lt minutes lt 59 HOUR 00 lt hour lt 23 DOW 0 lt day of week lt 6 read only 0 Sunday DATE 1 lt date of month lt 31 MONTH 1 lt month of year lt 12 YEAR 00 lt year lt 99 SOUND The SOUND system variable allows the ACS Basic program to queue sound files for playing Queued sound files are played in the order that they were queued being removed as they are played A sound is queued by assigning the string value of the sound filename to the variable The currently playing sound may be determined by reading the value of the variable The queue may be flushed by assigning an empty string to the variable When the queue becomes empty any associated event handler specified with the ONEVENT statement is activated Up to 128 sounds may be queued Attempting to queue a sound when the queue is full results an Invalid WAV file error Queued sounds play even if the Basi
101. D FORNEXT Ready Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 30 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 LIST 10 FOR A 1 TO 10 20 PRINT A 30 NEXT A Ready and there it is You can RUN it to verify that it still works Modify it to count backwards by changing line 10 and adding the STEP keyword 10 FOR A 10 TO 1 STEP 1 m You can LIST and RUN it Then let s SAVE this as FORNEXTSTEP Type SAVE FORNEXTSTEP Ene Now let s ask for a directory again DIR FORNEXT BAS 02 26 2012 04 57 02 PM FORNEXTSTEP BAS 02 26 2012 05 12 56 PM 2 files 0 directories Both programs files are there ACS Basic provides a shortcut for loading and running a program file just type RUN followed by the file name Basic will do the NEW LOAD and RUN all in a single step RUN FORNEXT 4o0uihuNHdmD wo 10 Ready RUN FORNEXTSTEP Saving Rules 1 Programs can be filed onto a micro SD card installed in the Color LCD 2 directory of what files are on the card can be obtained by the DIR command 3 Programs are saved to the card with the SAVE command 4 Programs are retrieved from the card with the LOAD command 5 Programs may be retrieved and executed with the RUN command 6 ACS Basic remembers the last program file name used with LOAD RUN or SAVE so a modified program can be saved into the same file using a SAVE command without a name Copyright 2010 2014
102. EEN OBJ OPTION Positive Negative 3 WIDTH Pivot Pivot Point Point The next two OPTION properties align the needle to the IMAGES bitmap resource 3 1 4 2 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 3 HALIGN O LEFT 1 CENTER 2 RIGHT 3 0 4 1 4 VALIGN 1 4 1 0 1 MIDDLE 2 TOP 3 1 4 0 The last four OPTION properties configure the needle s minimum and maximum offsets the corresponding minimum and maximum values Both the offsets and values can be negative The minimum offset is the offset from the IMAGES edge the needle will be drawn at when the object s VALUE is at the specified minimum value Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 104 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 The maximum offset is the offset from the IMAGE edge the needle will be drawn at when the object s VALUE is at the specified maximum value SCREEN OBJ OPTION 5 MIN VALUE 9 SCREEN 6 MIN OFFSET 7 MAX VALUE 8 OFFSET Listbox Screen Object The Listbox screen object displays the IMAGES bitmap resource with overlaid up down buttons on the right hand side and the object s DATA displayed as text strings using the object s SCHEME font If no IMAGES bitmap resource is specified a box of the configured TPAD Scheme s off color is drawn if the object s SCHEME s FONT s background is not transpa
103. ETURN d FRI RETURN d SAT RETURN Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 187 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Displaying an Animated Radial Gauge This short program displays a radial gauge whose indicator needle ramps from min to max and then back down Here s how it works In order to make the program somewhat easier to read a file defining several CONSTant variables is INCLUDEd on line 15 Here s the contents of included file constants bas type constants bas CONST False 0 True 1 CONST ScreenWidth 320 ScreenHeight 240 REM Screen Object Types CONST None 0 Icon 1 Button 2 ToggleButton 3 BackButton 4 Slider 5 CONST Label 6 TouchKeypad 7 RadialGauge 8 LinearGauge 9 Listbox 10 CONST SpinnerKnob 11 Textbox 12 REM Alignment and Transparencies CONST Left 0 Center 1 Right 2 Top 0 Middle 1 Bottom 2 Solid 0 Transparent 1 REM Drawing Surfaces CONST Display 0 Work 1 Background 2 REM Screen Events CONST DestructedEvents 1 ConstructedEvents 2 REM Screen Object Event Mask bits CONST TouchEvents 1 ValueEvents 2 ReleasedEvents 4 REM Screen Object Events CONST Touched 1 ValueChanged 2 Released 3 REM Icon Options CONST NumberOfImages 0 Attributes 1 DisableAdvance 1 REM SpinnerKnob and Gauge Options IndicatorLength 0 IndicatorZero 1 IndicatorWidth 2 MinValue 5 MinAngle 6 MaxValue 7 MaxAngle 8 Slider Options MinOffset 6 MaxOffset 8 Gauge Options HAlign 3 VAlign
104. EVENT notifications The same program can demonstrate the toggle functionality by simply changing the object type 10 REM Toggle Button Demo 15 0 REM Disable ANSI text 20 SCREEN OBJ TYPE 3 REM Set screen object to Toggle Button 25 SCREEN OBJ SCHEME 0 0 0 REM Set button s scheme pair to 0 1 30 5 0 2 0 0 116 SCREEN OBJ Y 0 0 109 REM Set button s location on screen 35 9SCREEN OBJ IMAGE 0 0 ButtonK4 bmp REM Set button s image 40 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 0 Press REM Set button s text 45 SCREENS CHANGETO 0 REM activate screen O 999 GOTO 999 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 98 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual Back Button Screen Object 8 September 2014 The Back Button screen object displays a bitmap with the object s TEXT label that will pop the screen stack when pressed The button can auto colorize for press release feedback using the object s SCHEME and provide EVENT notifications Slider Screen Object The Slider screen object displays a horizontal or vertical slider The slider uses two bitmap resources configured with the IMAGE and OVERLAY The IMAGE bitmap resource supplies the slider base and the OVERLAY bitmap resource supplies the slider button The slider orientation is controlled by the aspect ratio of the IMAGES resource bitmaps that are wider than they are tall operate horizont
105. EXITFOR 40 20 PRINT A 30 NEXT A 40 PRINT Done Ready And when you RUN it Counting Rules 1 variable can appear on both sides of the assignment equal sign The variable on the right hand side refers to its existing value and the left hand side variable will receive the new value 2 You can implement a count sequence by assigning an initial value to a variable advancing it by adding or subtracting to it then checking if it is at the ending value and looping back if it is not 3 Basic provides a FOR NEXT command with an optional STEP clause to simplify counting 4 Nested FOR NEXT loops must be closed from the inside out inside loops first You can t jump into the middle of a FOR NEXT loop an error will result on the NEXT command 6 You should only jump out of a FOR NEXT loop using the system EXITFOR command Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 29 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Remembering your Programs The Color LCD wouldn t be very useful if you always had to type in your programs every time you turned it on The longer your programs are the more of a problem this would become The Color LCD has a slot for a micro SD memory card You can SAVE your programs by name on the card and LOAD or RUN them later by referring to the same name Think of the micro SD card as a file drawer that holds many files You can create a new file and
106. GE 0 0 Gauge 07 White TransparentMaskIndexed 240 bmp 50 SCREENS CHANGETO 0 60 WAIT SCREEN EVENT 70 FOR n TO 100 STEP 1 9jSCREEN OBJ VALUE 0 0 n NEXT n 80 FOR n 100 TO STEP 1 SCREEN OBJ VALUE 0 0 n NEXT n 90 GOTO 70 999 GOTO 999 When the program is run the gauge needle moves from the MinAngle position when the VALUE is zero to the MaxAngle position when the VALUE is 100 then reverses Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 189 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Displaying an Animated Analog Clock This short program displays an old style analog clock whose hands move to show the Real Time clock s time every second Here s how it works The clock hands are drawn as elongated 3 sided polygons Line 25 allocates the polygon vertices coordinate arrays The program minimizes flicker by using double buffering static content the clock face image is drawn on the background surface then copied to the work surface and dynamic content the clock hands are drawn on top The work and display surfaces are then exchanged for the next update Line 30 selects the background surface draws the round clock face using a resource bitmap then selects the work surface Line 35 establishes an event handler that will execute once a second when the SECOND system variable changes Line 40 then executes continuously except for once a second when the e
107. HR 226 CHR 148 CHR 148 10060 FOR I 1 TO 10 10065 PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 CHR 128 10070 NEXT I 10075 PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 CHR 152 10080 RETURN Ready And when you run it run Here s a box and here s another Ready Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 44 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 If you change the GOSUB to a GOTO you will get an error when your program executes the RETURN command it doesn t know the way back that is remembered by the GOSUB Subroutines are used to replace common or duplicate code If you look at our program there s another common piece of code that could be made into a subroutine the PRINTing of the Unicode prefix for the box drawing extended characters PRINT CHR 225 CHR 148 Let s make this repetitive code into a separate subroutine it could go above or below we ll put it below 10100 REM Print the Unicode prefix characters 10105 PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 10110 RETURN list 10 PRI 20 GOS 30 PRI 40 GOS 50 END 10000 10005 10010 10015 10020 10025 10030 10035 10040 10045 10050 10055 10060 10065 10070 10075 10080 10100 10105 10110 Ready NT Here s a box UB 10000 NT and here s another UB 10000 REM Draw a box using ANSI characters PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 FOR I 1 TO 10 PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 NEXT I PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148
108. Here s the complete modified sonar sweep program that now uses the double buffering approach run it and notice that the flickering is gone 10 REM Sonar Sweep 20 JANSI ENABLE 0 BACKLIGHT 1 centerX 160 centerY 120 radius 90 leftX centerX radius 1 leftY centerY radius 1 width radius 1 2 height radius 1 2 5 SURFACE 2 60 DRAW FILL 0 0 320 240 RGB 0 0 0 70 DRAW CIRCLE centerX centerY radius RGB 255 255 255 80 SURFACE 1 FOR angle 0 TO 359 DRAW COPY 2 leftX leftY leftX leftY width height lineX MULDIV radius 1 COS angle 1024 lineY MULDIV radius 1 SIN angle 1024 DRAW LINE centerX centerY centerX lineX centerY lineY RGB 255 255 255 DRAW TOGGLE NEXT angle GOTO 90 Notice that the circle is only drawn once in fact it could be a bitmap image Add the ButtonK4 bmp image into the background screen 75 draw bitmap centerX 88 2 centerY 22 2 ButtonK4 bmp Save and run it again You should see the sweep line rotating on top of the button Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 67 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Changing Direction The last example ran the animation at full speed there was no delay between screen updates and the angle was incremented through an entire circle of 360 degrees in one degree steps What if you wanted to simulate the second hand of a clock A few changes would be necessary th
109. IGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 FONT SPACINGX n This system variable sets the horizontal spacing for Font table entry n FONT SPACINGX n x Where Field Description n Font table entry 0 fixed width of the font x 1 14 pixels between characters 15 bounding box character width FONT SPACINGY n This system variable sets the vertical spacing for Font table entry n GFONT SPACINGY n y Where Field Description n Font table entry 0 fixed width of the font y 1 14 pixels between characters 15 bounding box character width FONT HALIGN n This system variable sets the horizontal alignment justification for Font table entry n FONT HALIGN n h Where Field Description n Font table entry 0 Left Justify h 1 Center Justify 2 Right Justify FONT VALIGN n This system variable sets the vertical alignment justification for Font table entry n FONT VALIGN n v Where Field Description n Font table entry 0 Top Justify 1 Center Justify 2 Bottom Justify Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 88 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 This short program shows the effect of the FONT HALIGN and FONT VALIGN system variables 5 REM Test FONT HALIGN and FONT VALIGN 10 ANSI CURSOR
110. J r y 2 0 1910 GOTO 2010 2000 REM draw second hand 2005 x 20 y 3 x 1 20 y 1 3 x 2 r y 2 0 2010 FOR n 0 TO 2 2015 X x n Y y n 2020 x n MULDIV X COS a 1024 MULDIV Y SIN a 1024 120 2025 y n MULDIV X SIN a 1024 MULDIV Y COS a 1024 120 2035 NEXT n 2040 DRAW POLYGON FILLED x y c 2045 RETURN Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 190 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Fixed Length Record File I O Here s a short demonstration of the FOPEN FREAD and FWRITE commands 5 DEL test dat 10 FOPEN 1 20 test dat 15 INPUT how many records n 20 FOR r TO n 1 30 FWRITE 1 r r str STR r 40 NEXT r 50 PRINT reading records 60 0 70 FREAD 1 r b b 75 IF FEOF 1 THEN 1000 80 PRINT rec r b b 90 r r 1 GOTO 70 1000 CLOSE 1 Ready run how many records 10 reading records rec 0 lt 5 rec 1 1 str1 rec 2 2 str2 rec 3 3 str3 rec 4 4 str4 rec 5 5 str5 rec 6 6 str6 rec 7 7 str7 rec 8 str8 rec 9 str9 Ready type test dat stro 1 stri 2 str2 3 str3 4 str4 5 str5 6 str6 7 str7 8 str8 9 str9 Ready Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 191 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Error Logging While developing programs without a serial connection or for stand a
111. LED Understands sussies ler erred etre gd iet 17 Talking to the Color ECD zc rtr ERE RU une 17 There Are Rules oie tete tar He Hep t e EH He RI cust ni Rods 18 Remembering Numbers and Strings nennen rennen rennen 19 Rules for Numeric Dat e RERO E SERERE EE ee VR e EK Ho US 20 Rules for String D ta isse eee tUe e e eee ane eec eerte 20 IUMTIPRTIM 20 Remembering Commands eese ener trennen trennen E ene 21 Changing your Program ete me eto te EROR RU ERREUR tee De ER 23 Controlling the Program Execution eese eene nennen rene een eene 24 Program Rules 3 scie IER RERO e este ERES 25 Learning Howto Countes ere Ro o Hei EHE OE HER HU o B ei rp ene He oes 26 Counting Rules sx sete un eee dee e edat emn 29 Remembering your Programs enne eene ener tree enne eere 30 Saying Rules satu oe d eye iei edi iei A pies eid ge bs 31 Things to do with Numbers eese enne ener teet tene trennen reet nest rennen ene 32 Only Whole Numbers Please eese eiei riak trente 32 The Size of Numbers tere raees 32 Comparing Numbers ueste tete er E Ee P 33 Combining Numbers in Order eee a trage 33 Numeric Operatot Rules 4 et SN emi 34 Things to do with Hee Ree 35 SUPIN TD
112. LETIME 2D634F50 01CF3E07 Date 12 Mar 2014 10 24 36 0500 X SmarterMail TotalSpamWeight 0 Authenticated this is a simple text message SMTP SEND N from to cc subject 4 header Sends the contents of a previously opened file N via the mail server previously specified by the SMTP SERVER command from to cc with subject and optional header that can specify MIME content headers to allow HTML e mails to be sent from a file In this example a HTML file is sent via mail server mail domain com at the specified IPv4 address and port using an authenticated login and the requisite MIME content header 10 REM smtp test 15 ONEVENT SMTP EVENT GOSUB 100 20 SMTP SERVER mail domain com 216 119 100 100 2525 c2VuZGVyQGRvbWFpbi5jb20 MTIZNA 25 OPEN 40 SampleEmail html rb 30 Header MIME Version 1 0 CHR 13 CHR 10 Content Type text html charset CHR 34 ISO 8859 1 CHR 34 35 SMTP SEND 0 cfsound4 domain com support acscontrol com test Header 40 GOTO 40 100 REM SMTP Event Handler 105 ON SMTP EVENT GOTO 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 110 PRINT unknown event RETURN 115 PRINT SMTP OK SMTP MESSAGE RETURN 120 PRINT SMTP ABORTED SMTP MESSAGE STOP 125 PRINT SMTP CONNECT SMTP MESSAGE STOP 130 PRINT SMTP HELO SMTP MESSAGE STOP 135 PRINT SMTP AUTH SMTP ME
113. LLIPSE FILLED x y width height color Draws a filled ellipse centered at x y of width and height using color Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 160 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 DRAW POLYGON x n y n color Draws an n sided polygon with the x and y array of vertices using color where n gt 3 Here s a sample program that draws regular polygons REM demo draw polygon ANSI ENABLE 0 BACKLIGHT 1 GOSUB 1000 INPUT how many sides n IF lt 0 THEN STOP GOSUB 1000 radius 100 xc 160 yc 120 DIM x n y n FOR i 0 TO n 1 x i MULDIV radius COS 360 i n 1024 xc y i MULDIV radius SIN 360 i n 1024 yc NEXT i DRAW POLYGON x y RGB 255 0 0 GOTO 25 1000 REM draw grid 1005 DRAW FILL 0 0 319 239 RGB 0 0 0 1010 FOR xg TO 320 STEP 10 DRAW LINE xg xg 239 RGB 64 64 64 NEXT xg 1015 DRAW LINE 319 0 319 239 RGB 64 64 64 1020 FOR yg TO 240 STEP 10 DRAW LINE yg 319 yg RGB 64 64 64 NEXT yg 1025 DRAW LINE 0 239 319 239 RGB 64 64 64 1030 RETURN Ready run how many sides 5 how many sides STOP in line 25 Ready And the resulting screen display DRAW POLYGON FILLED x n y n color Draws an n sided filled polygon with the x and y array of vertices using color where n gt 3 Try changing line 65 in the DRAW POLYGON example above Copyrig
114. N 270 1024 etc 5 Returns a string representation of the numeric argument TEST STR 1234 PRINT TEST 1234 SOCKET SYNC CONNECT N ip port connect send recv Initiates an outgoing synchronous network socket connection as file N using the string representation of the IPv4 IP address and port number The status of the connection send receive and disconnect process is returned as the value of this numeric function which can return the following values Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 124 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 SOCKET SYNC CONNECT D 7 escription 0 Unknown No Status 1 Disconnect Done No Error 2 Open Error requested socket failed to open 3 Connection Timeout no connection within the SOCKET TIMEOUTT N interval 4 Data Send Timeout no send data acknowledgment within the SOCKET TIMEOUTT HN interval 5 Receive Data Timeout no received data within the SOCKET TIMEOUTT N interval The connect user function is called when a connection is established The send user function is called to send data to the connected device using PRINT N or FPRINT N statement s Return zero to terminate the connection one to proceed to the recv function or two to be called again to send more data The recv user function is then called to receive data f
115. N OBJ OPTION 0 2 6 REM needle width 40 jSCREEN OBJ OPTION 0 0 3 1 REM needle halign 45 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 0 0 4 1 REM needle valign 50 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 0 5 0 REM min value 55 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 0 6 225 REM min angle 60 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 0 7 10000 REM max value 65 0 0 8 25 max angle 70 SCREEN OBJ IMAGE 0 Gauge Tach Black 3QTR 196x196 bmp 75 SCREENS CHANGETO 0 80 WAIT SCREEN EVENT 95 FOR n TO 10000 STEP 20 SCREEN OBJ VALUE 0 0 n NEXT n 100 FOR 10000 TO STEP 20 CREEN OBJ VALUE 0 0 n NEXT n 105 GOTO 95 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 103 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Linear Gauge Object The Linear Gauge screen object display the IMAGE bitmap resource with overlaid graphical needle that can be justified to the bitmap and configured for offset and value range using the OPTION properties The object s VALUE then sets the needle position bl 0 SCREEN OBJ SCREEN SCHEME XY qi VALUE TOUCHED The first three OPTION properties set the gauge needle length zero offset and width in pixels A positive zero Offset allows the needle to move along a line parallel to and inside its base A negative offset allows the needle to move along a line parallel to and outside of its base Shorter skinnier needles draw faster SCR
116. NT a Ready run 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 R 10 REM while wend test2 15 WHILE a 10 20 PRINT a 25 1 30 WEND Ready run Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 150 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 10 while wend test2 15 lt 10 20 WHILE lt 5 22 1 23 25 1 PRINT a 35 WEND Ready run Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 151 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Display Statements The following statements operate directly or indirectly on the Color LCD display There are statements to manage resources such as fonts and images perform drawing operations and configure and manage a higher level screen setup RESOURCES The ACS Color LCD 320x240 uses resources to provide fonts bitmaps and sounds in this mode These resources are loaded into a table in RAM where they can be rapidly accessed by the different commands that require them This resource table can be loaded from the on board Serial Flash or from the micro SD card upon reset or dynamically from the micro SD card during operation The table is searched from the beginning when resources are accessed with newly added resources located at the front of the table Each entry in the table consists of the size of the resource
117. Name 1 Chord 2 No Fill 4 Edged Here s a sample program that shows the results of combining the various style bits REM arc demo ANSI ENABLE REM draw grid FOR x 64 TO 256 STEP 64 DRAW LINE 0 239 64 64 64 NEXT x FOR 80 TO 160 STEP 80 DRAW LINE 0 319 64 64 64 NEXT REM init text font FONT HALIGN 1 QFONT VALIGN O 2 FONT FCOLOR RGB 255 255 255 REM draw eight styles of filled arcs DRAW ARC FILLED 64 80 80 80 45 135 RGB 255 0 0 0 DRAW TEXT 0 64 80 Style 0 DRAW ARC FILLED 128 80 80 80 45 135 RGB 255 0 0 1 DRAW TEXT 0 128 80 Style 1 DRAW ARC FILLED 192 80 80 80 45 135 RGB 255 0 0 2 DRAW TEXT 0 192 80 Style 2 DRAW ARC FILLED 256 80 80 80 45 135 RGB 255 0 0 3 DRAW TEXT 256 80 Style 3 DRAW ARC FILLED 64 160 80 80 45 135 RGB 255 0 0 4 DRAW TEXT 0 64 160 Style 4 DRAW ARC FILLED 128 160 80 80 45 135 RGB 255 0 0 5 DRAW TEXT 0 128 160 Style 5 DRAW ARC FILLED 192 160 80 80 45 135 RGB 255 0 0 6 DRAW TEXT 0 192 160 Style 6 DRAW ARC FILLED 256 160 80 80 45 135 RGB 255 0 0 7 DRAW TEXT 0 256 160 Style 7 GOTO 999 And the resulting screen display Style 4 Style 5 Style 6 Style 7 Style 0 Style 1 Style 2 Style 3 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 159 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 DRAW BOX x1 yl x2 y2 color Draws a box with corners at x1 yl a
118. ONFIG VALUEIn f dee den teh GRA ege 85 CONFIG DEFAULT iil iita ttp ot 85 CONFIG WRITE Tay E edge 85 CARD MO UN ie S sel nantes E E A Eak 85 Display System Variables 5 es eedem aie AR be AR RIO ae 85 ANSE iet OI e orn ER Rete re rr ret tete peres 86 QANSLENABLE itr e RUE OR EHE ERREUR seapeasseaesdavesodpoaseseests 86 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 QANSILCURSOR sth ces bude deg Here oe Ee rr te e eee ne 86 ANSESCROLE aneinander o 86 QANSEWRAP edic ete te d ie ra aie eerte e Ero e ee e epe em eerie 86 ROW CR 86 QANSI iitusaueei e RO RO 86 5 5 Gh RR ORO RUP 86 OFON Toere 87 QFONTEENTSII uina ea n ERR de ee RUNE tine RE EN 87 QFONT BCOLOR R iit S t tut Eee t at ds uut 87 QFONT FGOLOR R 4 the ete o m ee ee eet o ce reine oes 87 FONT SPACINGS n iere te te le eee Un o M RR eec n es 88 FONT SPAGINGY egies etr er e dere ioe 88 QFONT HABIGN n iiie a eei eiue a 88 FONT VALIGN 2 eet Reemi Bd 88 QFONT BTRANSP n ie teense
119. Pv4 address 192 168 1 100 on port 25 20 SMTP SERVER 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 100 Specify a connection to mail server mail domain com at IPv4 address 216 119 100 100 on port 2525 with usernameb64 of sender domain com base64 encoded as c2VuZGVyQGRvbWFpbi5jb20 and passwordb64 of 1234 base64 encoded as MTIzNA online tool such as http www base64encode org used to encode the username and password 20 SMTP SERVER mail domain com 216 119 100 100 2525 c2VuZGVyQGRvbWFpbiSjb20z MTIZNA SMTP SEND from to cc subject message Sends a text message via the mail server previously specified by the SMTP SERVER command from to with subject In this example a single string message is sent without login using an intranet mail relay 10 REM smtp test 15 ONEVENT SMTP EVENT GOSUB 100 20 SMTP SERVER 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 100 25 SMTP SEND cfsound4 acscontrol com support acscontrol com test this is a simple text message 30 GOTO 30 100 REM SMTP Event Handler 105 ON QSMTP EVENT GOTO 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 110 PRINT unknown event RETURN 115 PRINT SMTP OK SMTP MESSAGE RETURN 120 PRINT SMTP ABORTED SMTP MESSAGE STOP 125 PRINT SMTP CONNECT SMTP MESSAGE STOP 130 PRINT SMTP HELO SMTP MESSAGE STOP 135 PRINT SMTP AUTH SMTP MESSAGE
120. REEN OBJ OPTION O 0 1 GSCREEN OBJ OPTION O 0 9 SCREEN OBJ TYPE 15 31 SCREEN OBJ IMAGE 15 31 SCREEN OBJ OVERLAY 15 31 SCREEN OBJ SCHEME 15 31 15 31 15 31 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 15 31 SCREEN OBJ MASK 15 31 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 15 31 0 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 15 31 1 lt GSCREEN OBJ OPTION 15 31 9 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 25 SCREEN OBJ SCHEME 0 0 SCREEN OBJ Y 109 REM Set button s image REM Set button s text REM Activate screen 30 SCREEN OBJ X 116 35 SCREEN OBJ IMAGE 0 0 ButtonK4 bmp 40 QSCREEN 0OBJ TEXT 0 0 Press 45 SCREENS CHANGETO 999 GOTO 999 72 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 This program initializes the first screen object zero of the first screen table entry zero to position a button drawn using the built in ButtonK4 bmp resource at the center of the screen The gray button is labeled with the text Press and is colorized using scheme table entry zero The Screen Framework is then started by the navigation to this screen using the SCREENS CHANGETO command Your display should look like the following note how pressing the button changes its color shading automatically using the second entry of the scheme pair Press
121. RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 FONT These system variables are used to access the individual elements of the Font table They require an index that ranges from 0 to 31 to refer to the 32 Font table entries FONT EFNTS 0 FONT BCOLOR O FONT FCOLOR O FONT SPACINGX 0 GFONT SPACINGY O Font Table _ GFONT HALIGN O Fontoo FONT VALIGN O Font 01 B FONT BTRANSP O Font 02 GFONT FTRANSP O i Font 29 FONT EFNT 31 Font30 77 FONT BCOLOR 31 Font 31 GFONT FCOLOR 31 GFONT SPACINGX 31 GFONT SPACINGY 31 FONT HALIGN 31 GFONT VALIGN 31 GFONT BTRANSP 31 GFONT FTRANSP 31 FONT EFNT n This system variable sets or gets the embedded font resource name in the resource table for this Font table entry FONT BCOLOR n This system variable sets or gets the background color for Font table entry n FONT BCOLOR n RGB R B Where Field Description n Font table entry RGB R G B Background color as RGB565 FONT FCOLOR n This system variable sets the foreground color for Font table entry n FONT FCOLOR n RGB R B Where Field Description n Font table entry RGB R G B Background color as RGB565 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 87 ALL R
122. S Sarasota Florida 54 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Drawing Boxes How about drawing boxes You could compute and draw each line making up the box or have ACS Basic draw it for you if you provide the locations of two diagonal corners Here s the command format DRAW BOX x1 y1 x2 y2 color X1 corner 1 x coordinate 0 319 y1 corner 1 y coordinate 0 240 X2 corner 2 x coordinate 0 319 drawing SURFACE using y2 corner 2 y coordinate 0 240 color RGB565 box pixels color Draws a box from diagonal corners x1 y1 to x2 y2 on the Here s the program 10 REM Draw a blue box around the screen edge 15 ANSI ENABLE 0 20 DRAW FILL 0 0 320 240 RGB 0 0 0 25 DRAW BOX 0 0 319 239 RGB 0 0 255 30 GOTO 30 and if you want a filled box 10 REM Draw a blue box around the screen edge 15 ANSI ENABLE 0 20 DRAW FILL 0 0 320 240 RGB 0 0 0 25 DRAW BOX FILLED 60 60 260 180 RGB 0 0 255 30 GOTO 30 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 55 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Drawing Circles How about drawing a circle Here s the command format DRAW CIRCLE x y r color x center x coordinate 319 y center coordinate 240 r circle radius 0 319 color RGB565 circle pixels color Draws a circle of radius r centered at x y on the cur
123. S LIST N start end FONTS LIST start endj sss 155 FONTS LOAD filename fonts epe ee re et i tege 155 FONTS SAVE filename fonts eee esee eee enne 155 DRAWING dun nte EROS REI PEORES 156 DRAWANIT OS HE 157 DRAW COPY sourceSurface SX SY dX dY width height sess 157 DRAW TRANSLATE sourceSurface SX SY dX dY width height mode 157 DRAW TOGGLE iis iet itte iv e Ede dod 158 DRAW PIXEL x y 158 DRAW FILL x y width height color endcolor angle sees 156 DRAW LINE startX startY endX endY 3 158 DRAW LINE DASHED startX startY endX endY color pattern scale sess 158 DRAW ARC y width height startDegrees endDegrees color ec 159 DRAW ARC STYLED y width height startDegrees endDegrees color style 159 DRAW BOX x1 yl 2 COLO Pca eee de Nee Nr tede tite Mies nat 160 DRAW BOX DASHED 1 yl 2 y2 color pattern scale eese 160 DRAW BOX FILLED x2 yl y2 color esses enne enne enne enne 160 DRAW CIRCLE x y v Color 160 DRAW ELLIPSE y width height color eese 160 DRAW ELLIPSE FILLED x y width height color
124. S2 keyboard so that error messages can be viewed and the program operation can be refined quickly otherwise the program may silently stop running leaving no clue as to what has happened Program lines may be viewed with the LIST statement All program lines may be cleared with the NEW statement Program execution is started using the RUN statement Upon power up ACS Basic clears the program memory and awaits statement or program line entry via the serial port Program lines may be edited via a connected ANSI terminal or computer with ANSI terminal emulation with the EDIT statement See the EDIT keyword command definition below for more information Entering an Escape character 0x1B twice in succession via the serial port while a program is running will cause termination of the program and ACS Basic will output a message then await further statement or program line entry via the serial port If the program is awaiting input by executing an INPUT statement a trailing carriage return may be necessary to terminate the INPUT before the Escape sequence is seen new Ready 10 for i 1 to 10 20 print i 30 delay 10 40 next i list 10 FOR i 1 TO 10 20 PRINT i 30 DELAY 10 40 NEXT i Ready run 4 lt Escape key pressed twice here ESC at line 20 Ready Variables ACS Color Basic has four types of variables 32 bit Integer Numeric 32 bit Integer Numeric Arrays unsigned 8 bit character Strings and unsigned 8 bit character S
125. SB DEVICE Connector with USB Cable This consists of a USB A to Micro B cable that connects the Color LCD s DEVICE connector to your PC The USB_POWER jumper by the USB DEVICE connector must be installed WARNING Do not install the USB_POWER jumper if powering the display through the SERIAL connector or external Ethernet power injection module High voltage will be injected back through your USB cable to the host computer USB A to Micro B Cable Via ETHERNET Connector with Power Over Ethernet This requires the optional POE module be installed on the Color LCD and IEEE802 3af Ethernet power injector cabled to the ETHERNET jack on the display PWRI28RA 19W Power Over Ethernet Injector The connection supports Power Over Ethernet POE if the optional POE module is installed on the controller and can be used to power the display with remote power injection The POE support is IEEE802 af compliant and provides a Class 0 signature Both DC power on Spares mode B and DC power on Data mode A operation is supported ETHERNET POE DC Power on Spares POE DC on Data Pin MDI Signal MDIX Signal MDI Signal MDIX Signal 1 TX RX TX PSE 2 TX RX TX PSE RX PSE 3 RX TX RX PSE TX PSE 4 PSE PSE 5 PSE PSE 6 RX TX RX PSE TX PSE 7 PSE PSE 8 PSE PSE More information about powering the display can be found in the Color LCD 320x240 Display Terminal
126. SD card See the appendix JSON File Formats in the Color 320x240 LCD Display Terminal User s Manual Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 155 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 DRAWING There are three drawing surfaces Display Work and Background The Display surface is the one that is currently being shown on the LCD The Work surface is where most drawing is done before being swapped with the Display surface The Background surface provides a content area that can be seldom drawn and copied to the Work surface before additional drawing is done on top Background Surface Work Surface Display Surface shown on LCD Q drawing takes place the currently selected draw surface Commands are provided to render pixels lines fills boxes circles ellipses text and images The X and Y coordinate for drawing start at 0 0 at the lower left corner of the display 0 239 319 239 000 OEF 13F OEF 0 0 319 0 000 000 13F 000 Drawing is clipped at the coordinate boundaries of the display In order to avoid flickering as the display is updated the following sequence should be utilized 7 Switch to the Background draw surface 8 Draw any required static background content 9 Switch to the Work surface 10 Copy in the content from the Background surface to the Work surface and draw any dynamic content on
127. SSAGE STOP 140 PRINT SMTP FROM SMTP MESSAGE STOP 145 PRINT SMTP TO SMTP MESSAGE STOP 150 PRINT SMTP CC SMTP MESSAGE STOP 155 PRINT SMTP DATA SMTP MESSAGE STOP 160 PRINT SMTP QUEUE SMTP MESSAGE STOP 165 PRINT SMTP SUCCESSFUL SMTP MESSAGE STOP Ready run SMTP 250 maila20 webcontrolcenter com Hello 96 252 xxx xxx SMTP 250 SIZE 31457280 SMTP 250 AUTH LOGIN CRAM MD5 SMTP 250 SMTP SUCCESSFUL 221 Service closing transmission channel STOP in line 165 Ready Here is the contents of file SampleEmail html notice that the file is opened for reading in binary mode lt html gt lt body gt This is a test HTML e mail message sent from a file lt p gt lt p gt lt a href http www cfsound com gt http www cfsound com lt a gt Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 147 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 lt body gt lt html gt And here s the received e mail with headers Return Path lt cfsound4 acscontrol com gt Received from mail domain com pool xxx xxx xxx xxx tampfl fios verizon net xxx xxx xxx xxx by maila20 webcontrolcenter com with SMTP Tue 11 Mar 2014 07 27 16 0700 From cfsound4 domain com To support acscontrol com Subject test MIME Version 1 0 Content Type text html charset ISO 8859 1 Content Transfer Encoding 8bit Message ID 58e
128. STOP 140 PRINT SMTP FROM SMTP MESSAGE STOP 145 PRINT SMTP TO SMTP MESSAGE STOP 150 PRINT SMTP CC SMTP MESSAGE STOP 155 PRINT SMTP DATA SMTP MESSAGE STOP 160 PRINT SMTP QUEUE SMTP MESSAGE STOP 165 PRINT SMTP SUCCESSFUL SMTP MESSAGE STOP Ready run SMTP 25 acsservr Hello 192 168 1 200 SMTP 250 TURN SMTP 250 ATRN SMTP 250 SIZE 2097152 SMTP 250 ETRN SMTP 250 PIPELINING SMTP 250 DSN SMTP 250 ENHANCEDSTATUSCODES SMTP 250 8bitmime SMTP 250 BINARYMIME SMTP 250 CHUNKING SMTP 250 VRFY SMTP 250 SMTP SUCCESSFUL 221 2 0 0 acsservr Service closing transmission channel STOP in line 165 Ready Here s the received e mail with headers Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 146 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Return Path lt cfsound4 acscontrol com gt Received from acsservr pool 96 252 xxx xxx tampfl fios verizon net 96 252 xxx xxx by maila20 webcontrolcenter com with SMTP Wed 12 Mar 2014 08 24 37 0700 Received from 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 200 by acsservr with Microsoft SMTPSVC 5 0 2195 7381 Wed 12 Mar 2014 10 24 36 0500 From cfsound4 acscontrol com To support acscontrol com Subject test Return Path cfsound4 acscontrol com Message ID lt ACSSERVRhzsDY1YhiIAQ00002cf acsservr gt X OriginalArrivalTime 12 Mar 2014 15 24 36 0421 UTC FI
129. September 2014 INCLUDE path Program or Direct mode Includes ACS Basic statements from a SD card file specified by path The full path to the file must be specified and must not start with a leading backslash e Statements in the file without line numbers are immediately executed e Statements with line numbers are entered as if they were typed in adding new or replacing existing numbered lines e Note that INCLUDE must be the ONLY statement on a line fnot present the BAS file extension on the filename at the end of the path is assumed IF test THEN line label statement ELSE line2 label2 statement2 Program mode only Conditional execution jump The expression fest is evaluated and if non zero program execution continues at line or label or the single statement is executed If the optional ELSE clause is present and the fest expression evaluates to zero program execution continues at ine2 or label2 or the single statement2 is executed Some IF statement examples 10 IF A 0 THEN 100 20 IF A 1 THEN GOTO 200 30 IF A 0 THEN PRINT A was zero ELSE 100 40 IF A 1 THEN PRINT A was zero ELSE PRINT A non zero Multiple conditions can be tested at the same time by combining two or more fest expressions with the logical AND OR operators 20 IF A 1 AND B 2 THEN PRINT Both A and B are correct 30 IF A 1 OR B 2 THEN PRINT Either A or B is correct ELSE PRINT Neither A or B IF test THEN
130. T 9 Lowercase SCREEN OBJ OPTION 10 Style Lowercase 125 ONEVENT SCREEN OBJ EVENT GOSUB 1000 130 SCREENS CHANGETO 135 WAIT SCREEN EVENT 999 GOTO 999 1000 REM screen object event handler 1005 ON SCREEN OBJ EVENT GOSUB 0 0 1015 0 1010 RETURN 1015 ON SCREEN OBJ GOSUB 0 1025 0 0 1045 0 0 1060 0 0 1075 0 1020 RETURN 1025 IF SCREEN OBJ VALUE 1 lt gt EnterKey THEN RETURN 1030 SCREEN OBJ TEXT O 2 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 1 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 1 1035 IF SCREEN OBJ TEXT 2 exit THEN 9999 1040 RETURN 1045 IF SCREEN OBJ VALUE 4 lt gt EnterKey THEN RETURN 1050 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 0 5 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 4 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 4 1055 RETURN 1060 IF SCREEN OBJ VALUE 7 lt gt EnterKey THEN RETURN 1065 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 0 8 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 7 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 7 1070 RETURN 1075 IF SCREEN OBJ VALUE 10 lt gt EnterKey THEN RETURN 1080 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 11 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 10 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 10 1085 RETURN 9999 END When the program is started this is the screen displayed Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 109 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Touching the Password textbox pops up the keypad and animates the textbox rectangle indicating that the control has focus Pressed keys are entered in password style until the Enter key is pressed then the control s TEXT
131. T 0 160 10 MID BOT 0 309 10 RIGHT BOT 0 10 120 LEFT MID 0 160 120 MID MID 0 309 120 RIGHT MID 0 10 229 LEFT TOP Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 162 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 DRAW BITMAP x y imageResourceName Draws the named bitmap image from the resource table with the lower left corner located at x y Here s a sample The RESOURCES LIST command is used to see what bitmap resources named starting with Background One of these named resources is then drawn on the display resources list background bmp Background DateTimeScreen bmp 153 676 Background HomeScreenWithACSLogo bmp 153 676 Background PoolScreen bmp 153 676 Background TimerEditScreen bmp 153 676 Background TimersScreen bmp 153 676 Ready list 10 REM DRAW BITMAP demo 15 ANSI ENABLE 0 BACKLIGHT 1 20 DRAW BITMAP 0 0 Background HomeScreenWithACSLogo bmp 25 GOTO 25 Ready run And the resulting screen DRAW BITMAP INDEXED index x y imageResourceName Draws a portion of the horizontally stacked bitmap image from the resource table selected by index at X y The stacked image must be square based upon the image height The number of instances or portions contained in the image equals the image width divided by the image height This command can be used to implement an animated image by changing the index and redra
132. T seven 1080 ENDFUNCTION 1090 FUNCTION seven value 1100 six value seven value six PRINT six 1110 ENDFUNCTION 1120 FUNCTION six value 1130 five value six value five PRINT five 1140 ENDFUNCTION 1150 FUNCTION five value 1160 four value five value four PRINT four 1170 ENDFUNCTION 1180 FUNCTION four value 1199 three value four value three PRINT three 1200 ENDFUNCTION 1210 FUNCTION three value 1220 two value three value two PRINT two 1230 ENDFUNCTION 1240 FUNCTION two value 1250 one value two value one PRINT one 1260 ENDFUNCTION 1270 FUNCTION one value 1280 one value 1290 ENDFUNCTION Ready run one two three four five six seven eight nine 1024 Ready vars ten gt r w IntFunction 1024 line 1000 nine IntFunction 512 line 1030 eight gt IntFunction 256 line 1060 seven gt r w IntFunction 128 line 1090 six gt IntFunction 64 line 1120 five gt r w IntFunction 32 line 1150 four gt IntFunction 16 line 1180 three gt r w IntFunction 8 line 1210 two IntFunction 4 line 1240 one r w IntFunction 2 line 1270 Ready And again if we STOP the program in the deepest nested function you can see the nested function arguments notice that each function uses a parameter named value but these value argument variables are local to each function Th
133. TEP 2 20 PRINT A 30 NEXT A Ready Now RUN it RUN 1 3 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 27 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 The initial value ending value and optional STEP value don t have to be numbers they can also be numeric variables And the STEP value can be negative to Let s replace line 10 again to try this Type 10 FOR A 10 TO 1 STEP 1 Your program should now look like LIST 10 FOR A 10 TO 1 STEP 1 20 PRINT A 30 NEXT A and when you RUN it There s a few more important things to know about FOR NEXT First you shouldn t try to GOTO into the middle of a FOR NEXT loop When the Color LCD encounters the NEXT command without having seen the matching FOR first it gets confused and gives you an error Here s an example of that error we add a line at the beginning of the program to GOTO line 20 which is inside the FOR NEXT loop LIST 5 GOTO 20 10 FOR A 10 TO 1 STEP 1 20 PRINT A 30 NEXT A Ready RUN Nesting error line 30 NEXT without preceding FOR The second thing to remember is that if you nest FOR NEXT loops one inside of another you must close the inner loop before closing the outer loop Here s the right way to nest loops LIST 10 FOR X 1 20 3 TO 1 STEP 1 30 PRINT X X Y SY 40 NEXT Y 50 NEXT X Ready RUN WWWNNNP PB lt lt lt l
134. The object s VALUE gets or sets the position of the OVERLAYS bitmap resource an arc relative to the IMAGES bitmap resource s center If an OVERLAY image is not provided a radial indicator line is drawn instead The color of the radial line is controlled by the screen object s SCHEME WCOLOR 0 and the indicator length zero and width are controlled by three screen object OPTION values BMP Resources 9 SCREEN OBJ TJ r3 OVERLAYS SCREEN The spinner handle indicator position and value relationship is controlled by four screen object OPTION values 90 degrees SCREEN OBJ OPTION A 5 MIN ANGLE e 6 MIN VALUE 1 180 0 degrees i degrees N GSCREEN OBLOPTION Fi 7 MAX ANGLE c C VALUE 270 degrees are two bitmaps for a spinner knob screen object the base IMAGES and the spin handle OVERLAYS Notice the magenta background that will become transparent when the control is rendered Spinner 33x33 bmp Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 106 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Knob_150x150 bmp And here is a sample program that displays the knob at the center of the screen along with a label at the top of the screen showing the VALUE as the knob is rotated by touching and turning 10 REM spinner knob 15 INCLUDE constants
135. UNDS aodio ABORTO DOOR BRA OD AR PRINTS 81 QOBAUD inunecinstoetetembhepme me Det ROI e Of Oe ete 82 ON RIGEN 82 enean eto peo ette o d Hd Oe pee s 82 CIB Dd 82 QODMXRESET usata nn mor RU OR REED IH Ve tM er Eee Ud 82 QDMX MASTER diio teh eod ede ede pte dedi tede m o vede dede 83 QDMX DATAJ x s ii eite eee UE ERE a ree EIS HE RUE 83 Shits BAM ES erue 83 OSMTP caen Rea up n PORE 83 QSMTP EVENT seriei em aU NR FERE DRE So PERROS 83 DER E E ti ee bris 83 E 83 C Ou G 83 QCONEIG ono UU ire E eh e Ue E Eins 84 QCONEFEIG ITEMS sio oie deren epe ie dep de d i vie depre dede 84 QCONFIG TYPE n uet d i ip 84 CONFIG NAMES 1 84 QCONFIG VALUES n f eee tetti netten 64 QCONFIG MIN n iiis eere HR RR ori aegre 84 CONFIG MAX A 84 QCONFIG FEIEEDS In iiti te pe ettet rp Up 85 QCONFIG FIELDOS R f ette ete ete He seta eene 85 CONFIG SEPARATORS n f 85 QC
136. URCES FLASHERASE command e Corrected FONTS LIST and SCHEMES LIST headers and optional range argument handling e For label and listbox screen objects added check for object s Scheme s font if background transparency then don t draw the background box when no object IMAGES resource defined Sep 25 2013 e Added textbox screen object e Added support for labels at the beginning of program lines and as the target of GOTO GOSUB etc e Added support for nested block IF ELSE ENDIF e Added UBOUND function e Changed line editor to preserve leading spaces after line numbers to allow code indenting Sep 11 2013 e Internal test revision Nov 25 2013 e Changes to allow compilation for either 16 or 32 bit integer values Dec 16 2013 e Internal restructuring of variable representation Added DHCP support Added NUM command for auto numbering support Mar 12 2014 Added command history capability Initial DMX512 via Ethernet using Art Net support Initial SMTP send e mail capability Internal restructuring of program source files Added CONFIG FIELDS CONFIG SEPARATORS and CONFIG ITEMS system variables to facilitate writing configuration editor sample Made user functions first class and callable in expressions Added SOCKET async and SOCKET sync functionality Added SEARCH BREAK and CONTINUE commands Removed EXITFOR command now superceded by BREAK added dyadic PRINT USING and FMTS capability Added CHANGE command
137. Wing commands specify the color to use with a 16 bit additive RGB color model expressed with a signed integer value or using the RGB red green blue function 3 The DRAW POLYGON commands require arrays of the x and y coordinates of the polygon vertices The arrays must be pre DIMensioned and loaded with the vertex coordinates before the polygon can be drawn 4 DRAW TEXT command uses embedded font file EFNT resources to render the text on the screen The style color alignment and transparency of the drawn text are controlled by referring to a configured entry in the FONTS table 5 The DRAW BITMAP commands render Windows BMP image resources on the screen The x and y coordinates refer to the placement of the lower left corner of the image resource on the screen 6 Drawing is cumulative each successive DRAW command builds on the results of prior commands Making Things Move So we know how to make static screens using the DRAW commands How do we make something that moves Let s draw a simple old style sonar screen like the ones used on submarines It consisted of a circle and sweeping line that rotated from the center We know how to clear the screen draw the circle and line but how do we make the line rotate around the circle We know the circle s center coordinate would be the line s starting point but how to we dynamically compute the rotating line s end coordinate For that we need to use some mathematics
138. Y coordinates for drawing start at 0 0 at the lower left corner of the display and range to 319 239 at the upper right corner of the display as shown in this diagram X 0 y 239 X 319 y 239 Screen Coordinates X 0 y 0 X 319 y 0 Drawing is clipped at the coordinate boundaries of the display commands that specify coordinates outside of these boundaries will not affect the display when either coordinate exceeds these values Pixels The screen is divided up into thousands of dots arranged in columns 0 319 and rows 0 239 that can be individually colored with one of 65536 colors In computer terminology these dots are referred to as pixels The pixel color is selected by specifying the amount of three pure color components that are added to form the desired color the amount of Red the amount of Green and the amount of Blue In computer terminology this is referred to as an additive RGB color model The Color LCD supports 32 Red levels 0 31 64 Green levels 0 63 and 32 Blue levels 0 31 for each pixel There are more green levels than red or blue because the human eye is most sensitive to changes in green Thirty two unique values can be determined using 5 binary bits and sixty three unique values can be specified using 6 binary bits so this form of RGB color encoding is known as RGB565 Hey the total number of bits is 16 the same number in our integer arithmetic So since the colors are additiv
139. a Send Timeout no send data acknowledgment within the SOCKET TIMEOUTT N interval 5 Receive Data Timeout no received data within the SOCKET TIMEOUTT N interval Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 179 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Server Blocking Listen The synchronous socket server listen takes the form SOCKET SYNC LISTEN N port connect recv send N File number port String representation of IPv4 address and TCP IP port number connect User function called when connection occurs recv User function called to receive data from file N send User function called to send data to file N The SOCKET SYNC LISTEN function opens a TCP IP port as file N using the port string e When a remote client establishes a connection to the listening port the user provided connect function is called e When this function returns the user provided recv function is called to input data from the remote device using INPUT N or FINPUT N statements The recv function should return one to send more data two to receive more data or zero to disconnect e Next the user provided send function is called to output data to the remote device using PRINT N or FPRINT N statements The send function should return one to wait for received data two to send more data o
140. a string value You can tell that they return a string value because their function names end with a dollar sign The CHR function takes a number argument and returns a single character string where the character is the ASCII character of the decimal number see http www asciitable com Let s try it PRINT CHR 65 A Ready PRINT CHR 48 e Ready The ERR function takes no argument and returns the string of the last error message that Basic encountered This will be useful later on when you want your programs to be able to handle some errors without stopping There is a table of error messages in the ACS Basic Reference at the end of this manual Let s try it PRINT ERR 0 error Ready PRINT 5 90 Divide by zero error Ready PRINT ERR Divide by zero error Ready Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 40 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 The FMT function takes two arguments the first is a string containing information about how to format the second argument into the string value that it returns The description of the format string argument can be found in the ACS Basic Reference section of this manual Let s try it The HEX STR function takes a numeric argument and returns the hexadecimal string equivalent Let s try it PRINT HEX STR 25 19 Ready PRINT HEX STR 256 100 Ready The INSERT function takes three argumen
141. ached the limit FOR NEXT loops can be nested and don t have to be the only statements on the line FOR NEXT loops can be exited from within without the variable reaching the limit using the BREAK statement FOR NEXT loops can be continued from within without executing all of the loop statements using the CONTINUE statement Asthe FOR NEXT counted loop uses the control stack to execute you should not jump out of or into the encompassing code block of statements To leave the counted loop force the variable to the limit value or use the BREAK statement e The number of nested FOR NEXT WHILE WEND loops block IF THEN ELSE ENDIF FUNCTION ENDFUNCTION and GOSUB subroutines is limited e Execution of a FOR statement without a subsequent NEXT causes a Nesting Error e Execution of a NEXT statement without a preceding FOR causes a Nesting Error FINPUT N var var Gets the value s for one or more variables from a single line from open file N 0 9 Note that when an end of file occurs the variables will have their last value Test the FEOF N system variable to detect this condition The data items in the file are separated by commas and string values must be surrounded by double quotes See the FPRINT N statement below that can be used to produce a file in the correct format If the data in the file ends before all of the variables have been assigned values an Out of Data Error
142. ally now that you know you can have multiple statements on a line you can shorten this up some more while still keeping it readable list 10 PRINT Here s box GOSUB 10000 30 PRINT and here s another GOSUB 10000 50 END 10000 REM Draw a box using ANSI characters 10005 GOSUB 10100 PRINT CHR 140 10010 FOR I 1 TO 10 GOSUB 10100 PRINT CHR 128 NEXT I 10025 GOSUB 10100 PRINT CHR 144 10030 GOSUB 10100 PRINT CHR 130 10035 FOR I 1 TO 10 PRINT NEXT I 10050 GOSUB 10100 PRINT CHR 130 10055 GOSUB 10100 PRINT CHR 148 10060 FOR I 1 TO 10 GOSUB 10100 PRINT CHR 128 NEXT I 10075 GOSUB 10100 PRINT CHR 152 10080 RETURN 10100 REM Print the Unicode prefix characters 10105 PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 RETURN Ready Rules for Editing 1 You can modify program lines in place using the EDIT command 2 While EDITing a program line the arrow keys move the blinking cursor left and right and the backspace key deletes the character to the left 3 While EDITing a program line any other character that you type will be entered into the line where the blinking cursor is you are always in insert mode 4 You discard your changes while editing by ESCaping pressing the ESC key twice in a row 5 You can accept your editing changes by pressing Enter you don t have to be at the end of the line 6 Changing the line number of an EDITed line will add or replace the n
143. ally and bitmaps that are taller than they are wide operate vertically SCREEN OBJ OVERLAYS SCHEME VALUE TOUCHED SCREEN OBJ OVERLAYS SCHEME Y VALUE TOUCHED 0 Untouched 1 Touched 0 Untouched 1 Touched gt BMP Resources SCREEN BMP Resources 9 SCREEN The slider screen object can be configured for min max values and corresponding button center to base bitmap pixel offsets via the OPTION properties SCREEN OBJ OPTION 5 MIN VALUE 6 MIN OFFSET 7 MAX VALUE 8 MAX OFFSET 9 SCREEN If an OPTION offset property is zero the corresponding offset is equal to the width height of the button bitmap Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 99 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 If both of the OPTION min and max value properties are zero the slider object s VALUE ranges from 0 e 32767 Here are two bitmaps for a horizontal slider the base IMAGE and the button OVERLAYS Notice the green background that will become transparent when the control is rendered And here s a short program to initialize and display the slider 5 REM slider demo 10 ANSI ENABLE 0 15 SCREEN 0BJ TYPE 0 0 5 REM screen object 0 slider 20 SCREEN OBJ IMAGE O 0 Slider Red H WDivisions234x31 bmp 25 9SCREEN 0OBJ OVERLAY 0 0 S
144. amed MyFunction 10 FUNCTION MyFunction parm1 parm2 that takes two arguments an integer named parm1 and a string named parm2 Defines a string function named Test that 100 FUNCTION Test takes no arguments The ENDFUNCTION command ends a function definition Any additional statements following on the same line are ignored When the defined function is called the ENDFUNCTION command behaves like a RETURN command execution continues after from where the FUNCTION was called FUNCTIONs may be located at the beginning of the program or elsewhere After they have been defined the functions may be called to execute the commands that they encompass The function call actually invokes a defined function by creating the function s parameter list variables assigning the matching argument list expressions to them then executing the function s statements as a subroutine The function argument variables and any additional variables that are created inside the function are valid throughout the execution of the function and any nested function calls and are discarded upon execution of the ENDFUNCTION command 10 MyFunction 10 test Values may be passed to a function in three ways through the function call argument list through the global function s variable name or through any other variable defined outside of the execution of the function Values may be returned from a function in two ways through the global function s variable nam
145. amming This network socket programming achieves communication between two machine applications using a client server methodology one device s application establishes itself as a network server that listens for incoming TCP IP connections on a specified port number The other device s application implements a network client that connects to a listening server with subsequent message exchange The client device then disconnects from the server and the process can repeat ACS Basic Sockets The ACS Basic socket implementation is highly simplified and half duplex communication ping pongs back and forth between the client and server devices The Client device initiates a connection to a listening Server device and after the connection is established sends the first message then receives a response The Server device listens for a connecting Client device and after connection is established receives the first message then sends a response This is slightly different from conventional socket programming where each side can send and receive at the same time The following diagram is a simplified representation of the communication sequence CLIENT SERVER Connect to Connection remote address gt gt from remote address and port and port yes a oO gt Receive data l sent l recd Receive response 4 Send response sent
146. an t be assigned to after they are created 10 REM define CONSTants 20 CONST Limit 10 Abort ABORT Ready run Ready vars Limit gt r o Int 10 Abort r o Str ABORT Ready CONTINUE Program mode only Continues next iteration of FOR NEXT or WHILE WEND loops execution continues at the closest NEXT or WHILE statement 10 REM while continue wend test 15 WHILE a 10 20 1 25 IF amp 1 THEN CONTINUE 40 PRINT a 45 WEND Ready run DATA Program mode only Enter inline DATA statements holding values that can be accessed by READ and ORDER statements All related DATA statements should be in a group of sequential lines DEL path Delete files and directories on the SD card The full path must be specified Directories must be empty to be deleted In program mode Path may be a constant string or you can use a string variable as the path by concatenating it to such a string DEL PATHS In direct mode the quotation marks not required DELAY value Pause program execution for value 20mSEC While the delay is in process Events can occur but any defined ONEVENT handlers will not be executed until the delay has expired 10 REM delay for one second 20 DELAY 50 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 129 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 DIM var size sizel size2 Dimension a numeric or character arr
147. ange or enforce expression execution priority with the innermost grouped parenthesis expression evaluated first The six test relational operators lt gt lt lt gt gt can be used in any expression and evaluate to 1 if the tested condition is TRUE and 0 if it is FALSE The IF and LIF commands accept any non zero value to indicate a TRUE condition Multiple test operators can be combined with the logical NOT AND OR operators and suitable parenthesis There are six operators for bit manipulation amp l lt lt gt gt these may only be applied to integer operands The 16 bit positions in the integer are numbered from right to left starting with 0 the Least Significant Bit up to 15 the Most Significant Bit or sign bit MSB LSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 16 bit Integer value Thus the value 1234 in binary bit form is Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1234 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 And the value 1234 in binary bit form is Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1234 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 The bitwise unary operator yields the one s complement of its following integer operand that is it converts each 1 bit
148. angle centered on the screen We need X and Y coordinate arrays that each hold 3 values Here s the program REM Draw a triangle 9ANSI ENABLE 0 DIM x 3 y 3 REM Allocate coordinate arrays DRAW FILL 0 0 320 240 RGB 0 0 0 REM Load x amp y coordinates 0 100 0 60 1 220 1 60 2 160 2 180 DRAW POLYGON x y RGB 255 128 128 GOTO 80 And you can also fill it in change the DRAW POLYGON command to DRAW POLYGON FILLED Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 57 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Drawing Text Let s say that we need to put text on the screen along with our graphics You could leave the ANSLENABLE system variable set to one and use PRINT commands How do you control where the text appears on the screen The ANSI command has a few additional modifiers two of which allow you to read the current ANSI row and column values or set them before printing ANSI ROW ANSI COL The ANSI rows and columns are numbered like this starting in the upper left of the screen Col 0 Col 1 Col 2 Col 42 Col43 Col 44 Row 0 Row 1 Row 2 Row 17 Row 18 Row 19 Try it out PRINT Hello in the middle of the screen ANSI ROW 10 ANSI COL 17 PRINT Hello While this does work there are a few problems The cursor appears b
149. are added until the minimum width is reached If 0 Flags 9 and appear the 0 is ignored If 0 is specified with an integer format the 0 is ignored prefix the output with a blank if the result is signed and positive the blank is ignored if both the blank and flags appear when used with o x or X format prefix any nonzero output value with 0 or respectively otherwise ignored Nonnegative decimal integer controlling the minimum number of characters printed If the number of characters in the output value is less than the specified width blanks are added to the left or the right of the values depending on whether the flag for left alignment is specified until the minimum Width width is reached If Width is prefixed with 0 zeroes are added until the minimum width is reached not useful for left aligned numbers The Width specification never causes a value to be truncated If the number of characters in the output value is greater than the specified width or if Width is not given all characters of the value are printed subject to the Precision specification Specifies a nonnegative decimal integer preceded by a period which specifies the number of characters to be printed the number of decimal places or the number of significant digits Unlike the Width specification the precision specification can cause truncation of the output value If Precision is specified as 0 and the value to be con
150. associated with the screen object for this screen object table entry SCREEN OBJ IMAGE screen object This system variable sets or retrieves the image resource used to render the screen object for this screen object table entry SCREEN OBJ OVERLAY screen object This system variable sets or retrieves the overlay image resource used to render the screen object for this screen object table entry SCREEN OBJ TEXTS screen object This system variable sets or retrieves the optional text resource used to render the screen object for this screen object table entry Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 111 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual SCREEN OBJ OPTION screen object option This system variable sets or retrieves the option values used to render the screen object for this screen object table entry Here are the currently defined option values for the defined object types Icon Screen Object option function 0 Number of Images override Attributes 1 1 Disable Touch Advance 2 Horizontal Alignment 3 0 Left 1 Center 2 Right Vertical Alignment 4 0 Bottom 1 Middle 2 5 6 7 8 9 Toggle Button Screen Object option function 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Slider Screen Object option function 0 1 2 3 4 5 Minimum Value 6 Minimum Offset 7 Maximum
151. atenate the input string with itself Notice how the function variable is global and retains its value outside of the function in this case causing an unintended side effect of the prior call s result being prefixed to the second function call s result 10 REM functions 15 PRINT test A 10 20 PRINT test abc 20 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 170 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 25 END 100 FUNCTION test in howmany 105 PRINT test in howmany 110 FOR count 1 TO howmany test test in NEXT count 115 ENDFUNCTION Ready run test A 10 AAAAAAAAAA test abc 20 AAAAAAAAAAabcabcabcabcabcabcabcabcabcabcabcabcabcabcabcabcabcabcabcabc Ready Function calls may also be nested you can call a function from within a function In the following example the function cube calls function cube to obtain the integer value of its argument cubed then converts that to a string that is PRINTed Note that the FUNCTION definitions can be in any order as they are identified and defined when the program starts 10 REM functions 40 PRINT cube 10 50 END 100 REM define functions 105 FUNCTION cube value 110 cube value value value 115 ENDFUNCTION 120 FUNCTION cube value 125 cube STR cube value 130 ENDFUNCTION Ready run 1000 Ready vars cube gt IntFunction 1000 line 105 cube r w Str
152. ay from The screens are stored in a table and are referred to by their entry number There are sixteen entries in the Screen table and each screen can contain up to thirty two screen objects Object entries in the Screen table must be contiguous screen objects will not be processed beyond the first zero entry Resource Table J Ae ee EE Other resource Image Overlay Image Image0 bmp Scheme Background Image X Image1 bmp x X Oth Y Text er resource ers a et Object 0 Event Mask Other resource Screen Object 1 Option 0 Image2 bmp Table iN Option 1 Screen 00 2 i er Screen 01 Object 31 resources Screen 02 M i 2 Option 9 Image3 bmp Image4 bmp Screen 13 14 i j ype Background Image Image Image5 bmp Screen 15 X if Overlay Image Y Scheme i Object 0 X Object 1 Y Scheme Table Text CM Scheme 00 i Event Mask Scheme 01 Object 31 Option 0 Scheme 02 Option 1 Option 9 Scheme 13 gt Scheme 14 Scheme 15 The individual fields in the Screens table are accessed
153. ay if static 4 15 IP address 4 16 Hex Byte 0 17 Hex Unsigned short 0 18 Hex Array 8 19 Short 0 20 RS485 Mode 0 CONFIG NAME3 n This read only system variable gets the name of the configuration item n QCONFIG VALUES n f This read only system variable gets the human readable value of the configuration item n If the item has fields then the second argument specifies the zero based field number CONFIG MIN n This read only system variable gets the allowed minimum value of the configuration item n CONFIG MAX n This read only system variable gets the allowed maximum value of the configuration item n Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 84 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 CONFIG FIELDS n This read only system variable gets the number of fields of the configuration item n QCONFIG FIELD n f This read only system variable gets the human readable value of the configuration item n s field f CONFIG SEPARATOR3 n f This read only system variable gets the human readable value of the configuration item n s field f separator CONFIG VALUE n f This system variable gets or sets the value of the configuration item n If the item has fields then the second argument specifies the zero based field number CONFIG DEFAULT n f This read only system variable gets the default value of the configuration item n If the item has
154. ay variable to hold size integers or character strings Arrays may be defined with up to three dimensions shown as size size1 and size2 Array variable elements may then be accessed using numeric indices separated by commas and enclosed in square brackets that range from the first element of zero to the last element of each dimension A 0 A 1 A size 1 If an attempt is made to access a variable as an array before it has been dimensioned a Dimension Error will result If an attempt is made to access an array element with a negative index or an index beyond the currently defined array size an Index Out of Range Error will result A variable may be re dimensioned however the current contents of the variable will be lost 10 REM multidimensional arrays 15 DIM test 3 4 5 20 FOR x TO 2 25 FOR y TO 3 27 FOR z TO 4 30 test x y z x y 2 32 NEXT z 35 NEXT y 40 NEXT x Ready DIR path Show files on the SD card An optional path may be specified Wildcard characters and may be used in the path with matching any single character and or matching multiple characters to show multiple files matching the pattern dir s wav S7DB WAV 323 028 A 08 08 2013 12 36 48 PM S7EB WAV 306 060 A 05 04 2006 12 39 00 PM S7FB WAV 1 164 232 A 05 04 2006 12 42 00 PM 3 file s 1 793 320 bytes 0 dir s 7 929 528 320 bytes free DIR N path Write a list of files on the SD card to an open
155. b 0 Solid 1 Transparent Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 90 8 September 2014 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 SCHEME These system variables are used to access the individual elements of the Scheme table They require an index that ranges from 0 to 15 to refer to the 16 scheme table entries Schemes are used in pairs with the lower numbered scheme entry used for rendering un pressed or inactive screen icons and the higher number entry of the pair used for rendering pressed or active screen icons SCHEME BCOLOR 0 SCHEME WCOLOR 0 SCHEME FONT 0 SCHEME COLORIZE 0 SCHEME TEXTPOS 0 SCHEME TRANSP 0 y GSCHEME BCOLOR 1 Scheme lt SCHEME WCOLOR 1 Table ue 5 1 Scheme 00 2 SCHEME COLORIZE 1 012 2 SCHEME TEXTPOS 1 Scheme 02 B SL SCHEME TRANSP 1 GSCHEME BCOLOR 15 Scheme 13 2 9SCHEME WCOLOR 15 SCHEME FONT 15 SCHEME COLORIZE 15 SCHEME TEXTPOS 15 SCHEME TRANSP 15 SCHEME FONT n This system variable gets or sets the font table entry number to be used for Scheme table entry n SCHEME FONT n f Where Field Description n Scheme table entry f 0 31 Fonts table entry SCHEME BCOLOR n Th
156. ber of zero in the list also causes execution to continue with the next statement if the expression evaluates to that position Upon return from the GOSUB execution continues with the next statement 5 REM ONGOSUB Demo 10 a 0 20 ON a GOSUB 100 200 300 400 30 GOTO 20 100 PRINT 1 105 1 110 RETURN 200 PRINT 2 205 1 210 RETURN 300 PRINT 3 305 1 310 RETURN 400 PRINT 4 405 1 410 RETURN Ready run 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1 ESC at line 105 Ready ON expr GOTO line linel line2 lineN Program mode only Case statement dispatching via jumps The value of expr is evaluated and a jump is performed to the lineO statement if zero linel if one etc If the value of expr is negative or greater than the number of line numbers present execution continues with the next statement A line number of zero in the list also causes execution to continue with the next statement if the expression evaluates to that position Labels can also be used in place of non zero line numbers 5 REM ON GOTO DEMO 10 0 20 ON a GOTO 100 200 300 400 30 GOTO 10 100 PRINT 1 105 1 110 GOTO 20 200 PRINT 2 205 1 210 GOTO 20 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 139 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 300 PRINT 3 305 1 310 GOTO 20 400 PRINT 4 405 1 410 GOTO 20 Ready run 1234
157. bles Since the event handler may be executed at any time in between any program statements care should be used when changing program variables from within an event handler as it may cause unexpected results in the execution of other program statements that may be using and depending upon the values of those same variables Incorrect or unexpected program execution may result code event handlers carefully See the ONEVENT statement definition below for a table showing what events may be processed and listing their relative priority Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 168 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 User Defined Functions ACS Basic also provides the ability for the user to write and call functions that are defined using statements in the program Two commands provide this capability FUNCTION and ENDFUNCTION The FUNCTION command starts a function definition It is followed by a variable name that also identifies its type as integer or string The function variable name is then followed by a parenthesized list of zero or more parameter variables The name of the function becomes a defined variable global to the entire program The parameter variables will be created and assigned values when the function is subsequently called Any additional statements following on the same line are ignored Here are a couple of examples Defines an integer function n
158. by ACS Sarasota Florida 31 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Things to do with Numbers So far we ve seen that the Color LCD can add and multiply numbers using numbers directly or numbers stored in variables The display can also subtract and divide numbers In computer terminology these actions are referred to as operators Let s try a few PRINT 4 2 2 Ready PRINT 9 3 3 Ready Here s a new operator that you probably haven t heard of or used before remainder of division In computer terminology this is referred to as a modulo operation The first number is divided by the second number and the remainder is returned So if two numbers divide evenly the modulo is zero no remainder PRINT 10 5 0 Ready However if the two numbers don t divide evenly the modulo operator returns the remainder after the division that would be performed So if we divide 5 by 4 the remainder or modulo would be 1 PRINT 5 4 1 Ready Operators usually go between two numbers or numeric variables However there are some operators that go in front of a single number or variable In computer terminology these are referred to as unary operators There are a couple of these but the most common is a leading minus sign referred to as negate 10 Ready PRINT A 10 Ready This is just a shorthand way of telling the Color LCD to subtract the number from zero
159. c Programming Manual 8 September 2014 ANSI These system variables are used to how and when Basic PRINT statements also affect the display GANSI ENABLE This system variable enables or disables whether PRINT statements are also sent to the display as ANSI text The default is enabled 1 See the PRINT statement below for additional information ANSI CURSOR This system variable enables or disables whether a blinking cursor is displayed on the display when ANSLENABLE 1 The default is enabled 1 GANSI SCROLL his system variable enables or disables whether a line feed on the last line of the display causes the screen to scroll up when ANSILENABLE 1 The default is enabled 1 ANSI WRAP This system variable enables or disables whether PRINTed text on the display wraps to the next line when it reaches the end of a line when ANSILENABLE 1 The default is enabled 1 ANSI ROW This system variable gets or sets the current row where PRINTed text will be placed ANSI COL This system variable gets or sets the current column where PRINTed text will be placed BACKLIGHT This system variable controls the display backlight Setting it to zero dims the backlight to the configured off setting setting it to one brightens the backlight to the configured on setting and setting it to 2 brightens the backlight and starts the configured automatic backlight dim timer Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 86 ALL RIGHTS
160. c program has stopped Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 81 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 BAUD The BAUD system variables allow the ACS Basic program to control the Color LCD serial port baud rate The baud rate is set by assigning a numeric selector value to the variable The current baud rate selector may be determined by reading the numeric value of the variable Note that the baud rate selector is saved in non volatile memory and is restored every time the Color LCD powers up The non volatile memory has a limited number of write cycles 100 000 and can be worn out by excessive writes so this system variable should not be written in loop or on every program execution Exercise caution to avoid non volatile memory failure A good practice is to check the variable s value and only then write to it if it is not the desired value BAUD Baud Rate 0 110 1 300 2 600 3 1200 4 1800 5 2400 6 3600 7 4800 8 7200 9 9600 factory default 10 14400 11 19200 12 28800 13 38400 14 57600 15 115200 MSG This system variable is updated by receipt of a serial data stream message that is framed with the SOM and EOM characters which not included in the MSG It retains the framed message until it is read at which point the search for the next received 9 SOM begins again It may a
161. c provides the concept of an Event Events occur outside of the normal program execution flow and are processed in between the execution of individual program statements Some system variables have Events associated with them and may be referenced in ONEVENT SIGNAL and WAIT statements There are three ways to process an event asynchronously with an ONEVENT handler synchronously with a WAIT statement or by polling the system variable s value in the program to see when the event occurs In order to process an event asynchronously Basic has to be informed of what code to execute when a certain event occurs This is done using the ONEVENT statement After Basic executes each program statement it scans the table of events looking to see if any have been signaled If an ONEVENT handler for a signaled event has been specified by the program then Basic will force a subroutine call to the event handler before the next program statement is executed Events have an implicit priority with higher priority events being able to interrupt execution of lower priority event handlers Here s an example of touch event handling 100 REM Test Touch Events 110 ONEVENT TOUCH EVENT GOSUB 1000 130 GOTO 130 1000 T TOUCH EVENT X TOUCH X Y TOUCH Y 1010 ON GOTO 1015 1020 1025 1030 1015 RETURN 1020 PRINT Touch Y RETURN 1025 PRINT Move 3X3 RETURN 1030 PRINT Release X Y RETURN 1035 RETURN Ready This would pri
162. correct it When it does look like this press Enter The line should be accepted as if you had typed it in again instead of editing You can look at it using the LIST command with the line number list 10005 10005 GOSUB 10100 PRINT CHR 140 Ready Now try running the program It should work the same as it did before the change Edit the other lines to make the same change Once you get the hang of using the EDIT command you ll probably find it much easier than typing the complete line over again and you ll tend to make fewer mistakes list 10 PRINT Here s a box 20 GOSUB 10000 30 PRINT and here s another 40 GOSUB 10000 50 END 10000 REM Draw a box using ANSI characters 10005 GOSUB 10100 PRINT CHR 140 10010 FOR I 1 TO 10 10015 GOSUB 10100 PRINT CHR 128 10020 NEXT I 10025 GOSUB 10100 PRINT CHR 144 10030 GOSUB 10100 PRINT CHR 130 10035 FOR I 1 TO 10 10040 PRINT 10045 NEXT I 10050 GOSUB 10100 PRINT CHR 130 10055 GOSUB 10100 PRINT CHR 148 10060 FOR I 1 TO 10 10065 GOSUB 10100 PRINT CHR 128 10070 NEXT I 10075 GOSUB 10100 PRINT CHR 152 10080 RETURN Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 46 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 10100 REM Print the Unicode prefix characters 10105 PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 10110 RETURN Ready run Here s a box and here s another Ready And fin
163. cted device using PRINT N or FPRINT N statement s Return zero to terminate the connection one to proceed to the recv function and two to be called again to send more data See the Socket Programming section below for more information and sample programs Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 125 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 UBOUND dim Variable dimNumber Returns the size of the dimVariable as it was declared in the DIM statement The optional dimNumber in square brackets defaults to 0 and can be 0 or 2 to obtain the size of the corresponding dimension 10 REM test multidimensional arrays 15 DIM test 3 4 5 20 FOR x 0 TO UBOUND test 0 1 25 FOR 0 TO UBOUND test 1 1 27 FOR z 0 TO UBOUND test 2 1 30 test x y z x y z 32 NEXT z 35 NEXT y 40 NEXT x 45 PRINT test UBOUND test UBOUND test 1 UBOUND test 2 50 FOR x 0 TO UBOUND test 0 1 55 FOR TO UBOUND test 1 1 57 FOR z TO UBOUND test 2 1 60 PRINT test x y z 62 NEXT z 63 PRINT 65 NEXT y 67 PRINT 70 NEXT x Ready run test 3 4 5 VAL expr Returns the numeric value of the string argument representation of a number TEST VAL 1234 PRINT TEST 1234 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 126 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Events ACS Basi
164. ction module High voltage will be injected back through our USB cable to the host computer Connect the USB A to Micro B cable to the Color LCD DEVICE connector Connect the other end of the cable into a USB port on your PC DEVICE ACS Color 320x240 LCD ColorLCD inf USBA Micro B Cable Windows will indicate that it has found new hardware and will eventually prompt for the location of a driver for the Color LCD Browse to the location of the ColorLCD inf file that you have downloaded and select it Windows should now finish installing the new hardware and it should be ready to use The COM port identifier that Windows will assign to the Color LCD will depend upon what other communications devices are present in the system and can be determined using the Device Manager TCP IP Raw Connection via Ethernet This requires a PC running an ANSI terminal emulator program that is capable of communicating using TCP IP Raw sockets Hyperterminal or the PuTTY program are examples The LCD display can be connected as an Ethernet device A standard RJ 45 connector is provided and it can be connected to a network with a standard Ethernet cable either straight or crossover detection and correction is automatic via HP Auto MDI MDI X configuration The network speed can be either 10 or 100 mbps with auto link negotiation A link activity indicator is provided on the ETHERNET jack Copyright
165. ctly as the interactive device with an external PS 2 keyboard This configuration would be hard to use due to the limited number of characters that can be displayed or if you re developing a graphics program Pop up Keypad This option doesn t require any additional hardware or device All interaction between the user and the Color LCD are performed directly with the display as the interactive device using the pop up touchscreen keypad This configuration would be hard to use due to the limited number of characters that can be displayed or if you re developing a graphics program Configuring the Color LCD Display To perform the exercises outlined in this manual the Color LCD must be configured to operate in ACS Basic mode This mode is set by changing a configuration item using the touchscreen on the display On reset or power up the Color LCD looks for a constant touch in one of four places If it sees the touchscreen being pressed as it comes up then it will bypass normal operation and enter one of four different screens The screen that we want is the Configuration Settings Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 14 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Touchscreen Calibration Diagnostics Configuration Resource Settings Flash Press and hold the lower left quadrant of the screen Then either power up the Color LCD or reset it u
166. currently display Screens table entry number on a stack deconstructs the current screen and then constructs and displays the contents of the of the Screens table screenNumber entry SCREENS POP Deconstructs the current screen and then restores the last pushed to Screens table entry number from the stack then constructs and displays it Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 167 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Events ACS Basic provides the concept of an Event Events occur outside of the normal program execution flow and are processed in between the execution of individual program statements Some system variables have Events associated with them and may be referenced in ONEVENT SIGNAL and WAIT statements There are three ways to process an event asynchronously with an ONEVENT handler synchronously with a WAIT statement or by polling the system variable s value in the program to see when the event occurs In order to process an event asynchronously Basic has to be informed of what code to execute when a certain event occurs This is done using the ONEVENT statement After Basic executes each program statement it scans the table of events looking to see if any have been signaled If an ONEVENT handler for a signaled event has been specified by the program then Basic will force a subroutine call to the event handler before the next program statement is executed Events have a
167. d the ColorLCD USB port to act as a serial communication device the baud rate does not matter You must have installed the ColorLCD inf driver when the unit was first connected to the PC Powering or resetting the display will disconnect and reconnect the USB requiring a re establishing of the connection in your terminal emulator Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 15 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 If you re communicating using the Ethernet and TCP IP Raw Sockets you should configure the terminal emulator connection to use the IP address and port number that matches your display s configuration The ColorLCD defaults to an IP address of 192 168 1 200 with a raw socket port of 23 Powering or resetting the ColorLCD will disconnect from the terminal emulator requiring a re establishing of the connection Start Hyperterminal Tera Term VT PuTTY or other terminal emulator program on your connected computer PC establishing the connection as outlined above Now power up or reset the Color LCD Display This message should appear on both the PC s terminal emulator program and the display ACS Basic v3 0 May 12 2014 10 49 30 Ready the v3 0 and date time specify which version Basic the Color LCD Display is running If you don t receive this message check your power supply and wiring Try turning the Display off and on again Remember if connecting via USB or Ethernet you mu
168. date 2 Connection Aborted 3 Connection Failed 4 HELO EHLO Failed 5 AUTH LOGIN Failed 6 FROM Failed 7 TO Failed 8 CC Failed 9 DATA Failed 10 QUEUE Failed 11 SUCCESS SMTP MESSAGE This system variable holds any text message associated with the SMTP EVENT SOM This system variable determines the character used to delineate the Start of Message It defaults to ASCII SOH 01 The Start of Message detection can be disabled by setting SOM to zero in which case the message accumulates until EOM is detected only EOM This system variable determines the character used to delineate the End of Message It defaults to ASCII ETX 03 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 83 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 CONFIG These system variables are used to access the ColorLCD configuration settings CONFIG ITEMS This read only system variable returns the total number of configuration setting items CONFIG TYPE n This read only system variable gets the type of the configuration item n CONFIG TYPE n Item Type Fields 1 Byte 0 2 Boolean 0 3 Unsigned short 0 4 Baudrate selector 0 5 Parity selector 0 6 Data Bits selector 0 7 Stop Bits selector 0 8 Keybeep selector 0 9 Firmware Version 0 10 Keypad style 0 11 Keypad scheme 0 12 Protocol selector 0 13 MAC address 6 14 IP address only displ
169. e 8 Maximum Value 9 Listbox Screen Object option function 0 Number of Data Items 1 Top Item 2 Item Height Override 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual Spinner Knob Screen Object option function 0 Indicator Length 1 Indicator Zero 2 Indicator Width 3 4 5 Minimum Angle 6 Minimum Value 7 Maximum Angle 8 Maximum Value 9 SCREEN OBJ 8 September 2014 Textbox Screen Object option function Styles 1 Numbers Only 2 Password only displayed 0 4 Lowercase 8 Uppercase 16 Read Only 1 Maximum Number of Characters 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 This read only system variable reflects the screen object number of the last screen object event SCREEN OBJ EVENT This system variable reflects the last screen object event There are currently three screen object events SCREEN OBJ EVENT Event 1 Screen Object SCREEN SCREEN OBJ was touched 2 Screen Object SCREEN SCREEN OBJ value has changed 3 Screen Object SCREEN SCREEN OBJ was un touched released SCREEN OBJ MASK This system variable gets or sets the screen object event mask There is one bit to enable or disable each of the screen object events a set bit enables the event The default SCREEN OBJ MASK is all events enabled Where the bits are number
170. e The NEXT command replaces two commands line 30 the advance of the count value and the GOTO portion of line 40 the counting loop Let s see how this works First the FOR command This command determines the count variable its initial value and the ending value Type 10 FOR A 1 TO 10 re Now as before we PRINT the count value Type 20 PRINT A Ene And finally the NEXT command This command advances the count value and executes the loop if more counting is necessary This is referred to as closing the loop Type 30 NEXT A ime Now list the program It should look like LIST 10 FOR A 1 TO 10 20 PRINT A 30 NEXT A Ready Now RUN it I5 O ATIO UU ds uer m 2 m a lt This program is one line shorter but does the same thing It is also easier to read and comprehend Try changing the initial and ending value to see the results Great But what if we want to count by two how do we do that It seems like the A A 1 is implied The Basic language designers thought of that and have provided another keyword that can be added to the end of the FOR command to specify the value to be added each time around the loop STEP The STEP keyword goes at the end of the FOR command after the ending value Let s replace line 10 with this new FOR command that has a STEP 2 on the end 10 FOR A 1 TO 10 STEP 2 Ene Your program should now look like LIST 10 FOR A 1 TO 10 S
171. e black must be equal to zero and white must be equal to 65535 largest 16 bit number The ACS Basic drawing commands allow your program to control the colors of one or more pixels at a time depending upon the command to draw graphic objects The command to draw a single pixel is the Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 50 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 simplest command this table shows how the command is constructed and what the command arguments are don t type this in directly it s a description showing you how to construct this command DRAW PIXEL x y color x screen x coordinate 319 y screen coordinate 0 240 color RGB565 pixel color Sets the pixel at x y on the current drawing SURFACE to color Let s use this description to construct a command that draws a white pixel at the center of the screen don t worry about the SURFACE system variable for now we need to specify the x and y coordinates and the desired pixel color draw pixel 160 120 65535 The white pixel is probably hard to see amongst the text on the screen you could draw a red pixel that might be easier to see but how to you specify the red color There s a built in function for that The RGB r g b function takes three arguments red level r 0 255 green level g 0 255 and blue level b 0 255 and does the math to combine them into a 16
172. e LCD 6 Each screen object is sent a message to render any additional dynamic content on the displayed surface After the screen is constructed a construction event is signaled via the SCREEN EVENT system variable with the 9 SCREEN variable identifying what screen number the event is being generated from This allows the Basic program to initialize any variables start timers or perform other functions specific to or required by the activating screen If a new screen is navigated to by a CHANGETO or PUSH or POP command while a current screen is being displayed a destruction event is signaled via the SCREEN EVENT variable and then the new screen is constructed This allows the Basic program to stop timers or disable other functions that were in use by the previous screen When the user touches the screen a message containing the touch state press move or release along with the screen coordinates is sent to each object on the screen Each object determines whether it is affected by the touch event possibly updating its state and updating its appearance on the screen If the object determines is has been touched or its VALUE has changed an event is signaled via the SCREEN OBJ EVENT system variable with the SCREEN OBJ variable identifying what screen object number the event is being generated from Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 75 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 20
173. e file that the CFSound not already queued VARS Displays a table of the name type and values of the variables that have been defined or created by use WAIT systemvar Execution pauses at this statement until the associated system variable has been signaled Note that all statements on the same line before the WAIT are executed continuously while waiting In this example program execution would pause at line 110 until all of the queued sounds had finished playing 10 SOUND one wav 20 SOUND two wav 30 SOUND three wav 40 SOUND four wav 50 SOUND five wav 60 SOUND six wav 70 SOUND seven wav 80 SOUND eight wav 90 SOUND nine wav 100 SOUND ten wav 110 WAIT SOUND In this example program execution would pause at line 40 until all of the queued serial data had finished sending 10 REM test EOT 20 FOR 1 TO 10 PRINT 0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ NEXT I 40 WAIT EOT 5 PRINT EOT Ready run 0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 149 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0
174. e mode ASC char Returns the numeric ASCII value of the character argument PRINT ASC A 65 ABS expr Returns the absolute value of the numeric argument PRINT ABS 10 ABS 10 10 10 CHR expr Returns an ASCII string containing the character equivalent of the expression argument PRINT CHR 65 A COS degrees Returns a scaled sine value of the degree argument where 1024 lt COS lt 1024 The degree argument ranges from 0 360 and arguments larger than 360 degrees are converted modulo 360 COS 0 1024 COS 90 0 COS 180 1024 COS 270 0 etc Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 120 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 ERR Returns the last error number Returns the string representation of the last error number FILE EXISTS path Returns one if the file specified by the path argument exists otherwise zero FIND var searchvar startpos Returns the zero based position of string search variable in string variable starting at zero or optional startpos or 1 if the search variable was not found TEST 012345 PRINT FIND TEST 3 3 TEST 012345 PRINT FIND TEST 3 4 1 FMTS fmt expr expr expr Returns a formatted ASCII string of zero or more numeric or string expressions using the string format specification fmt A format specification st
175. e motion should only occur once per second the rotation would have to move clockwise instead of counter clockwise and since there are 60 seconds around the face of a clock the motion would have to advance 360 degrees degrees 60 seconds X second Also zero seconds is straight up to the 12 o clock position which is not the zero angle position but 90 degrees Let s start by tackling the non zero angle for zero seconds and the clockwise motion Remember from the earlier mathematics section that the angle advances counter clockwise as the angle increases If you change line 90 in the previous program to STEP the FOR NEXT loop from 359 to 0 and run the program you will see that the motion is now in the clockwise direction If you change the STEP value from 1 to 6 the motion is faster but still in a clockwise direction So how can we translate the seconds to the required negative angle with the 90 degree offset Let s start by offsetting the zero angle from the 360 degree position by 90 degrees 360 90 450 degrees From the previous equation and results we know that we have to subtract 6 degrees per second angle 360 90 second 6 This equation yields angle 450 when second 0 and angle 96 when second 59 We need a way to limit the range of the computed angle to 0 359 degrees for use with the SIN and COS functions Enter the modulus operator Integer division truncates discards the fractional part
176. e or through any other variable defined outside of the execution of the function The operation of user functions is better shown with some examples In this first example a simple integer function named test is defined that takes three arguments and adds them together with the sum returned through the function name by assignment in line 110 Lines 100 through 115 define the function In lines 15 and 20 the function test is called twice with different arguments 10 REM integer function 15 test 1 2 3 PRINT 20 test 4 5 6 PRINT 25 END 100 FUNCTION test argi arg2 arg3 105 PRINT test argi1 arg2 arg3 5 110 test argl arg2 arg3 115 ENDFUNCTION Ready run test 1 2 3 test 4 5 6 Ready vars test r w IntFunction 15 line 100 Ready test test Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 169 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 The first thing to observe is if we STOP the program inside of the FUNCTION you can see the parameter variables that receive values from the function arguments These parameter variables are discarded when the function returns from the function call at the ENDFUNCTION statement 112 stop list 10 REM integer function 15 test 1 2 3 PRINT 20 test 4 5 6 PRINT 25 END 100 FUNCTION test arg1 arg2 arg3 105 PRINT test arg1 arg2 arg3 3 110 test argl arg2 arg3 112 STOP 115 ENDFUNCTION Ready
177. ected again Optionally an event handler specified with the ONEVENT statement may be activated upon an input closure which automatically clears the closure 10 ONEVENT QCLOSURE 0 GOSUB 100 20 ONEVENT CLOSURE 1 GOSUB 200 30 GOTO 30 100 PRINT contact closed RETURN 200 PRINT contact 1 closed RETURN Ready run contact closed contact 1 closed Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 79 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 OPENING x The OPENING x system variables allow the ACS Basic program to access the optional ACS COLOR LCD PS2 IO Module contact events The module must be installed and the PS 2 Enable configuration must be set to true There are 4 contact inputs permissible values for x are 0 through 3 Reading the variable returns a 1 if the input contact x has had an opening since last being read Openings are sticky and the program must clear the opening by assigning it a zero before it can be detected again Optionally an event handler specified with the ONEVENT statement may be activated upon an input opening which automatically clears the opening CAPTURE x CAPTURE CLOSURES x CAPTURE OPENINGS x The CAPTURE x system variables allow the ACS Basic program to access the optional ACS COLOR LCD PS2 IO Module capture events The module must be installed and the PS 2 Enable configuration must be set to true There are 4 contact
178. ectum eee aue re nU Ime 116 TOUCH KEYPAD ssepe y RAE eee Re EXE 116 QIOUGCH EVENT 4 siae ette hie RR QI GREG 116 etude enciende 117 QIOUGCH Y As ep nci dm EM nes 117 Operators sewers V HA 118 EEX PLESS1OMS 52 25 Mes 120 FEUDCEOLS cite etie 120 ASC Ch at Eee aR ee EB REI RUE RE 120 hiNOqMT UC M n 120 CHRS 6expL einem ueeune gai neath ang agente RERUM ERR URN 120 COS degrees eie anmaecn REP eH Rn p 120 ERR O S onset tuu teh e tM EE 121 121 TSE path ect ae nn b RE nah ioe mete RE 121 FIND var searchvar startpOs 121 FMTS fmt 1 expr expr expr 3I isset 121 E AKE E ED 0 gp 122 la lD ESINEN Se E eiae 122 Var A AEN 123 INSERT var start 2 cnet a S a n RR THERE GT AER RS 123 LEFT var vant RE ERA NERO RIO 123 AGEN VAD ie dele M t 123 MID39 var start JEN sete teorie irn hon ter Her ie REPE 123 MULDIV number multiplier divisor essere ennt nennen enne 123 MULMODf number multiplier divisor esses enne nennen nennen enne 124 RIGHTS Var l n
179. ecution continues with the following statement The status of the connection receive send and disconnect process is returned via the SOCKET EVENTT N system variable The connect user function is called when a connection is established The user function is then called to receive data from the connected device using INPUT N or FINPUT N statements s Return zero to terminate the connection one to return to the send function and two to be called again to receive more data The send user function is called to send data to the connected device using PRINT N or FPRINT N statement s Return zero to terminate the connection one to proceed to the recv function and two to be called again to send more data Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 148 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 See the Socket Programming section below for more information and sample programs STOP Program mode only Terminates the program and issues a STOP message Closes all open files 10 1 20 STOP Ready run STOP in line 20 Ready TYPE path Displays the contents of a SD card filename named path as ASCII characters on the serial port Path may be a constant string or you can use a string variable as the path by concatenating it to such a string PATHS In Direct mode the quotes are not required A double escape sequence will stop the portion of th
180. ed 15 0 MSB 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LSB Bit Value SCREEN OBJ EVENT 0 Screen object touched 1 Screen object value changed 2 Screen object un touched released Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 114 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 115 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 SURFACE This system variable sets the drawing surface for subsequent DRAW commands There are three drawing surfaces SURFACE Drawing Surface 0 Display 1 Work 2 Background Background Surface Work Surface Display Surface shown on LCD SP TOUCH These system variables allow program interaction with the display touchscreen and pop up keypad TOUCH KEYPAD This system variable is event capable is fired whenever a touch keypad event occurs and gets or sets the pop up touch keypad status TOUCH KEYPAD Keypad 0 no keypad QWERTY keypad Numeric keypad QWERTY keypad top Numeric keypad top Configuration keypad This system variable is event capable and is fired whenever a touchscreen event occurs The event values are TOUCH EVENT E
181. el width Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 74 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 65 ONEVENT SCREEN OBJ EVENT GOSUB 1000 70 SCREENS CHANGETO REM activate screen 0 75 GOTO 75 1000 REM screen object event handler 1005 IF SCREEN OBJ THEN ON SCREEN OBJ EVENT 1 GOTO 1015 0 1020 1010 RETURN 1015 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 1 Pressed RETURN 1020 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 1 Released RETURN And now when we run it and press the button the label above the button is updated to show the button s last state App started Button pressed Button released Diving Into the Screen Framework So how does this Screen Framework actually work It uses messages and the multiple drawing surfaces system to perform its magic When the screen framework is started by the initial SCREENS CHANGETO command the screen is constructed using the following sequence of steps 1 If there is a screen background image BMP resource specified it is drawn onto the background surface if not the background surface is filled with black 2 Each screen object is sent a message to render their background information 3 The background surface is then copied to the work surface 4 Each screen object is sent a message to render their working information 5 The work and display surfaces are then toggled so that what was the working surface is now the display surface and is being shown on th
182. eme 15 31 Black Replace Color X White Replace Color Font Number N Colorize X Text Position Transparency The following commands are provided to manage the contents of the Schemes table SCHEMES INIT Initializes the Schemes table SCHEMES LIST N start end SCHEMES LIST start end Lists the contents of the Schemes table optionally to a previously opened file N SCHEMES LOAD filename schemes Loads the Schemes table from a JSON formatted file on the micro SD card See the appendix JSON File Formats in the Color 320x240 LCD Display Terminal User s Manual SCHEMES SAVE filename schemes Saves the Schemes table to a JSON formatted file on the micro SD card See the appendix JSON File Formats in the Color 320x240 LCD Display Terminal User s Manual Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 165 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 SCREENS Screens are implemented to provide a grouped collection of placed screen objects such as buttons sliders and icons overlaid on top of a background image Screens are drawn entirely by the display including the automatic colorization of objects as they are manipulated with the interactions reported as events The screens may be navigated to directly by their number or like a stack last in first out Events are fired when screens are navigated to or aw
183. er Screen OB EC tse ode etie edet Pii ie E e endet 99 Label Screen Objects ioc oU e pl t Ue 100 Touch Keypad Screen Object n o ee bete te p t 101 Radial Gauge Screen 240404240000 nennen 102 Linear Gauge Object onein et eer E RUE OR UE 104 Listbox Screen Object eterne 105 Spinner Knob Object oe tee prre tee pe 106 Textbox venu a Pee tee de A a eem ers 108 QSCREEN OBJ SCHEME screen object eese eene eere nnne 111 GQSCREEN OBJ XI screen object eee e eto mee hr eerte teres 111 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 QSCREEN OBJ Y screen object eee a ette entente nennen nennen nettes 111 SCREEN OBJ VALUE Screen 111 SCREEN OBJ TOUCHED Screen object 111 QSCREEN OBJ IMAGES screen eerte 111 SCREEN OBJ OVERLAYS screen object esses 111 QSCREEN OBJ TEXTS screen 111 SCREEN OBJ OPTION screen object 112 OSCREEN OBJT S seno pr pee n ibs 114 OSCREEN OBIZ EVENT eid eii e en e eee EN ied 114 GQSCREEN OBJ MASK 3 c e ales nidi aste abu ae ERE 114 son ORE RE ROREM 116 QTOUGH t
184. es The individual character shapes and their size are obtained from another table in memory by their name these are the actual embedded fonts The two pieces of information the embedded font to use and how it is colored and positioned are selected as an entry in the font table used to draw the desired text In computer terminology this is referred to as rendering text The embedded fonts must be loaded into the display s memory in order to be used for drawing text They are stored in a collection with other items where they can be quickly accessed by their name It s a Matter of Resources In the Color LCD there is a collection of fonts and other objects that the Basic can draw with they are collectively known as Resources The Color LCD looks for resources to load in two places when it starts up if there is a micro SD card installed it tries to load a binary file named Resources bin and if that fails it tries to load the resources from the on board flash memory chip You can see this process happen when the Color LCD is powered on or reset the status of the resource search and load is displayed on the top few lines of the screen You can list the resources that are currently loaded the command is RESOURCES LIST Here is what the list would look like if no additional resources could be found and loaded at power up resources list AcsAnsiFont efnt 12 604 builtin AcsDefaultFont efnt 27 940 builtin ButtonK bmp 1 610 builtin
185. est 10 REM for break next test 15 FOR i 0 TO 10 15 FOR i 0 TO 10 20 IF i gt 5 THEN BREAK out 20 IF i gt 5 THEN BREAK 25 PRINT i 25 PRINT i 30 NEXT i 30 NEXT i 35 END Ready 40 out PRINT Done run Ready 0 1 0 2 1 3 2 4 3 5 4 Ready 5 Done Ready CHANGE string replacement Searches the entire program for case sensitive match of string and then prompts Yes No All eXit for replacement If either string or replacement contains a space enclose both in double quotes and separate them with a comma change send 200 send 200 header 15 CONST send 200 0 send content 1 send file 2 send 404 3 send disconnect 4 send 200 header Yes No All eXit y 15 CONST send 200 header 0 send content 1 send file 2 send 404 3 send disconnect 4 40 recvdata senddata sendstate send 200 line 0 send 200 header Yes No All eXit a 40 recvdata senddata sendstate send 200 header line 0 1150 line 0 ONERROR GOTO 1152 sendstate send 404 OPEN 1 1 sendstate send 200 header ONERROR GOTO 0 Ready CLEAR Erases all variables and closes all open files Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 128 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 CLOSE N Close file or internet streaming handle N 0 9 opened with OPEN N statement CONST var value 1 var value Creates one or more constant variables that c
186. esult you want In computer terminology this is referred to as an expression Usually when you perform a bunch of operations on numbers you do them in a left to right order So if you want to add two numbers and now double the result you might write PRINT 2 3 2 8 Ready You would expect the result to be 2 plus 3 equals 5 times 2 equals 10 right How did the Color LCD come up with the number 8 It turns out that in Basic like most computer languages there is an order in which numeric operations are performed In computer terminology this is referred to as operator precedence or operator priority If there wasn t an defined order then you could get different results each time or perhaps different results between different machines Negation is performed first then Multiplication Division and Modulo then Addition and Subtraction then Comparisons are performed last So the display does the 3 times 2 first then it adds the 2 which gives 8 instead of 10 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 33 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 What if you really want these operations done in the order that you wrote them down Well it turns out that you can specify the order by grouping operations together using parenthesis The Color LCD Basic will execute operations inside parenthesis first then use that result to perform the next operation in the expression So to get the result
187. ewly numbered line in your program the original line will remain in place and intact Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 47 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 There s a System So far we ve only defined our own variables numeric and string simply by using them in our programs to remember values We ve used commands and operators to access modify and compare their contents And we ve used built in functions like read only variables to extend our program operation with built in functionality What s next Just like the built in functions ACS Basic has some built in variables to access and modify values used by the Color LCD system These are called System Variables and they use a special naming so that they don t interfere with your program variables So what can these System Variables do for you How about timing Let s try to make a simple metronome application Type NEW and enter the following small program 10 REM Metronome 15 t INPUT Enter tempo 1 32766 tempo 20 IF tempo lt 1 OR tempo gt 32766 THEN GOTO 15 25 FOR i 1 TO tempo d d 1 NEXT i 30 IF t THEN PRINT Tick ELSE PRINT Tock 35 IF t THEN t 1 ELSE t O 40 GOTO 25 Ready Let s take a moment and see what this program is doing Line 10 is a REMark a comment telling us what this program is Line 15 initializes the tick tock variable
188. fields then the second argument specifies the zero based field number CONFIG WRITE n f Changes to the configuration settings affect the current value of RAM copies of the entries Setting this write only system variable to one forces the current value of item n to be written to the NVM backup store so that it will be remembered between restarts If the item has fields then the second argument specifies the zero based field number CARD MOUNT This system variable is used to mount and un mount the micro SD card Display System Variables ACS Basic also has built in display system variables System variables are denoted by a character as the first character of the variable name The system variable names are tokenized when entered to save program memory and speed program execution for example the system variable 9 SECOND would be tokenized to two bytes instead of seven bytes System variables may not be assigned a value by appearing in an FOR DIM INPUT READ FINPUT N or FREAD N statement Some system variables are read only and may not appear on the left hand side of a LET assignment statement Some system variables have Events associated with them and may be referenced in ONEVENT SIGNAL and WAIT statements See the description for the individual system variables and the Events section below for more information Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 85 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basi
189. ft 0 Center 1 Right 2 Top 0 Middle 1 Bottom 2 Solid 0 Transparent 1 REM Drawing Surfaces CONST Display 0 Work 1 Background 2 REM Screen Object Event Mask bits CONST TouchEvents 1 ValueEvents 2 ReleasedEvents 4 REM Screen Object Events CONST Touched 1 ValueChanged 2 Released 3 REM SpinnerKnob Options CONST IndicatorLength 0 IndicatorZero 1 IndicatorWidth 2 MinValue 5 MinAngle 6 MaxValue 7 MaxAngle 8 REM Slider Options CONST MinOffset 6 MaxOffset 8 REM Gauge and Icon Options CONST NumberOfImages 0 Attributes 1 DisableAdvance 1 HAlign 3 VAlign 4 REM Listbox Options CONST NumberOfItems 0 TopItem 1 ItemHeight 2 REM Textbox Options CONST Style 0 NumberOfChars 1 REM Textbox Styles CONST NumbersOnly 1 Password 2 Lowercase 4 Uppercase 8 Readonly 16 And here is the resulting screen display To use an indicator knob without the spinner don t supply the spinner bitmap and initialize the three indicator options Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 107 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 REM knob with indicator INCLUDE constants bas ANSI ENABLE False BACKLIGHT True CONST Knob 0 SCREEN OBJ TYPE Knob SpinnerKnob SCREEN OBJ IMAGE Knob Knob 150x150 bmp SCREEN OBJ X Knob ScreenWidth 2 150 2 SCREEN OBJ Y Knob ScreenHeight 2 150 2 SCREEN OBJ OPTION Knob IndicatorLength 75 SCREEN OBJ OPTION Knob I
190. g 1 THEN IF fields THEN IF CONFIG VALUE item field lt max THEN CONFIG VALUE item field CONFIG VALUE item field 1 ELSE IF CONFIG VALUE item lt max THEN CONFIG VALUE item CONFIG VALUE item 1 ENDIF ENDIF REM REM minus key REM IF CHR key AND editing 1 THEN IF fields THEN IF CONFIG VALUE item field gt min THEN CONFIG VALUE item field CONFIG VALUE item field 1 ELSE IF CONFIG VALUE item gt min THEN CONFIG VALUE item CONFIG VALUE item 1 ENDIF ENDIF REM REM X exit REM IF CHR key amp 223 X THEN IF editing 1 THEN editing ELSE PRINT END ENDIF ENDIF REM REM R reset default REM IF CHR key amp 223 R THEN IF editing 1 THEN GOSUB DefaultItem ELSE PRINT Default entire configuration y n IF CHR GETCH 1 amp 223 Y THEN FOR item TO items 2 GOSUB DefaultItem NEXT item ENDIF ENDIF ENDIF REM REM 9 keys REM Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 194 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 8490 IF key gt 48 AND key lt 57 AND editing 1 THEN 8495 IF itemType 0 OR itemType 2 OR itemType 13 OR itemType 14 THEN 8500 numberEdit 1 IF LEN number 5 THEN number number CHR key 8505 ENDIF 8510 IF itemType 12 THEN 8515 hexEdit 1 IF LEN number 2 THEN number number CHR key 8520 ENDIF 8525 IF itemType 17 THEN
191. g angles rotate clockwise 4 The modulus operator returns the remainder of the division of the two arguments Staging an Event We could add a 1 second delay using a 9 TIMER system variable and increment the second variable from zero through fifty nine every time that we read TIMER is zero There is another way that will allow our program to do other things instead of simply spinning in a loop waiting on a timer Welcome to Events Events are changes in your program s execution that can happen in between each statement The linear execution of your program s statements is interrupted to process the event and then execution resumes from where your program was interrupted Events are associated with and triggered by some system variables and can occur as a result of hardware or software actions You control how system variable events are processed in your program by associating them with an event handler The event handler is a subroutine you write that will be called when the event is signaled by changes in the associated system variable The event handler is configured or setup using the ACS Color Basic s ONEVENT command ONEVENT systemvariable GOSUB linenumber This command records the handler subroutine line number in an event table for the specified system variable entry Changes to system variables that cause events set a flag on their entry in the event table In between processing each program statement the Color LCD
192. g the object s SCHEME and can provide EVENT notifications BMP Resource Md SCREEN OBJ SCREEN 0 Untouched 1 Touched SCHEME TEXTS Hello VALUE TOUCHED To support the pop up keypad the Color LCD has four built in bitmap resources that it uses as buttons These buttons are gray in color and are colorized by the screen object s SCHEME when rendered ButtonK bmp ButtonK2 bmp ButtonK4 bmp ButtonM b 22x22 4x2 88 x 22 48 32 Here s a simple program that displays one of those buttons when it is run the button is colorized and it highlights when it is pressed on the screen 10 REM Button Demo 15 ANSI ENABLE REM Disable ANSI text 20 0 0 2 REM Set screen object to Button 25 SCREEN OBJ SCHEME 0 0 0 REM Set button s scheme pair to 0 1 30 5 0 2 0 0 116 SCREEN OBJ Y 0 0 109 REM Set button s location on screen 35 9SCREEN OBJ IMAGE 0 0 ButtonK4 bmp REM Set button s image 40 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 0 0 Press REM Set button s text 45 SCREENS CHANGETO 0 REM activate screen O 999 GOTO 999 Toggle Button Screen Object The Toggle Button screen object displays a bitmap with the object s TEXTS label that acts like an on screen latching button each press release toggles the button state The button can auto colorize for press release feedback using the object s SCHEME and provide
193. ght 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 100 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Touch Keypad Screen Object The Touch Keypad screen object provides the ability for the screen to pop up and display several different on screen keypads and receive the pressed characters as input Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 101 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Radial Gauge Screen Object The Radial Gauge screen object displays the IMAGE bitmap resource with an overlaid graphical needle that can be justified to the bitmap and configured for angle and value range using OPTION properties The object s VALUE then sets the needle angle BMP Resource SCREEN OBJ SCHEME SCREEN TOUCHED The first three OPTION properties set the gauge needle length pivot point offset and width in pixels positive pivot point offset allows the needle to rotate about a point before its base A negative pivot point offset allows the needle to rotate about a point along its length Shorter skinnier needles draw faster SCREEN OBJ OPTION z Positive Negative Pivot Pivot Point Point The next two OPTION properties align the needle s pivot point to the IMAGES bitmap resource 3 0 3 1 3 2 41 2 4 2 41 2 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 3 HALIGN 0 LEFT 1 CENTER 3 1
194. ght 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 24 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 When you press the key in response to the INPUT command without typing any characters first the INPUT variable receives an empty string otherwise the variable holds any characters that were typed in before the Ene key You can think of line 50 as reading IF variable Name not equal to empty string THEN GOTO line 20 And that is exactly what the program is doing However there is an error In computer terminology this is called a program bug Notice how the program still prints Hi before it stops when nothing is ENTERed This is because the program executes line 40 before it checks for Name being empty In order to fix this bug we have to check for the stop condition before we PRINT the Name Replace line 40 with the new IF THEN check Type 40 IF Name THEN STOP And then replace line 50 with the PRINT command Type 50 PRINT Hi Name The program should now look like LIST PRINT Hello from the Color LCD PRINT What s your name INPUT Name IF Name THEN STOP PRINT Hi Name GOTO 20 Ready RUN Hello from the Color LCD What s your name Steve Hi Steve What s your name STOP in line 40 Ready The new STOP command does exactly that it stops the program from running and shows you what line the program stopped on You can also use the END command
195. gram mode only Reads data from DATA program statements into variables You MUST issue an ORDER statement targeting a line containing a valid DATA statement before using READ RETURN Program mode only Return from a subroutine invoked via a GOSUB statement e You can RETURN from within a FOR NEXT WHILE WEND or block IF statement inside of a subroutine e Areturn without a prior GOSUB will generate a Stack Error REM Comment the remainder of line is ignored Used to document the operation of the program Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 143 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 REN oldfile newfile Renames oldfile to newfile Oldfile and newfile may be constant strings or you can use string variables as the files by concatenating them to string constants REN OLD NEWS In Direct mode the quotes are not required RESQ start end new incr Direct mode only Re sequences the program line numbers from start through end beginning with the value of new advancing by incr The default value of start is the first line of the program the default for end is the last line of the program the default for new is 10 and the default for incr is 5 e program is renumbered with all embedded references to the new line numbers corrected It is displayed and written to a file with the same name as the original program with the extension RSQ e If there
196. gram s normal flow of execution caused by hardware or software changes to system variables 2 To process events you create an association between a system variable and a subroutine in your program using the ONEVENT command The subroutine will be executed when the event is signaled by a change to the system variable The event is cleared by the RETURN from the event 3 You can disable further event handling for a system variable by executing an ONEVENT command with a line number of zero 4 Variables are shared between your mainline program and any event handlers Care should be exercised to ensure that inadvertent changes to variables in an event handler don t affect your main program logic 5 Events are prioritized only higher priority events able to interrupt an executing event handler 6 Event handlers should be short so that lower priority events have a chance to occur Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 70 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Taking Control with the Screen Framework By now you can probably see how you could use the DRAWing commands to construct some pretty fancy screens with animation There is another method available to provide multiple screens each with multiple controls controls that provide a higher level of functionality and take care of drawing themselves and interacting with the user This is accomplished using a built in Screens Framew
197. hat gets updated at the same time as SCREEN OBJ EVENT with the number of the object that caused the event SCREEN OBJ This read only system variable reflects the screen object number of the last screen object event The previous screen framework example for a single button polled the SCREEN OBJ EVENT using the multiple LIF statements in a loop However the SCREEN OBJ EVENT is event capable and in an associated event handler you can use the SCREEN OBJ system variable to identify what object the event is being generated from To simplify this processing we introduce a new ON command The ON command provides the ability to change the program s execution using the value of an expression in a single statement instead of testing for each condition with multiple IF or LIF statements It can make a program smaller and easier to read and understand The ON command is followed by the expression to evaluate then the execution directive which can be either GOTO or GOSUB and then a list of line numbers for each value of the expression The destination line number is selected from the list by the value of the expression ON Expr GOTO lineIfExpr 0 linelfExpr 1 lineIfExpr n ON Expr GOSUB lineIfExpr 0 linelfExpr 1 lineIfExpr n If the expression evaluates to zero the first line number in the list is used for the GOTO GOSUB an expression value of one selects the next line number two the next and so on
198. he maximum negative number is 2 147 483 648 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 32 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Comparing Numbers There are also operators for comparing two numbers Numbers can be checked to see if they re the same or not or if one is larger or smaller than another In computer terminology these checks are called comparison operators two numbers are compared with each other The results of a comparison are either true or false In ACS Basic a true comparison results in a 1 and a false comparison results in a zero To check for equality two numbers being the same we use the equal operator which is the equals sign PRINT 1 0 Ready PRINT 2 1 Ready So how do you test if two numbers are not equal ACS Basic uses a less than followed immediately by a greater than no space in between as the not equal operator Notice how this check gives the opposite result of the equal check PRINT 1 lt gt 1 Ready PRINT 2 lt gt 2 0 Ready Of course we can also check for numbers being less than less than or equal greater than and greater than or equal PRINT 2 lt 2 0 Ready PRINT 2 lt 2 1 Ready PRINT 4 gt 4 0 Ready PRINT 4 gt 4 1 Ready Combining Numbers in Order You don t have to only do a single operation on numbers at a time You can combine them into a series of operations to achieve the r
199. he micro SD card The binary resource file image can be generated by an ACS Windows utility that supports the concept of resource generation projects RSRCGEN XML project files See the appendix Resource File Generation in the Color_320x240_LCD_Display_Terminal manual RESOURCES SAVE filename bin Saves the current contents of the Resource table as a binary file on the microSD card RESOURCES ADD filename Adds the contents of filename from the micro SD card to the beginning of the Resource table Duplicate resources with the same name are not allowed RESOURCES REMOVE resourceName Removes the resource named resourceName from the Resource table RESOURCES EXTRACT pattern Extract the current contents of resources in the Resource table that match the pattern to the micro SD card Wildcards and may be used in an optional pattern to select which resources are extracted The user is prompted for existing file overwrite permission Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 153 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual Initial Resource Table Load 8 September 2014 When the ACS Color LCD 320x240 is powered up or reset it attempts to locate and load the resource table from several sources This process is outlined in the following flowchart Initialize default resources Detect and Initialize micro SD card Load Serial Flash Protected Resources
200. ht 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 161 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual DRAW TEXT font x y expression Draws the text string of the expression justified at x y using the attributes of Font table entry font 8 September 2014 Here s a sample program that shows how the font s HALIGN and VALIGN system variables affect the text display 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 REM demo DRAW TEXT FONT HALIGN FONT VALIGN ANSI ENABLE ANSI CURSOR 0 BACKLIGHT 1 REM Draw grid DRAW DRAW DRAW DRAW DRAW LINE 10 0 10 239 RGB 64 64 64 LINE 160 0 160 239 RGB 64 64 64 DRAW LINE 309 0 309 239 RGB 64 64 64 LINE 0 10 319 10 RGB 64 64 64 LINE 0 120 319 120 RGB 64 64 64 REM Draw aligned text in green QFONT FCOLOR O RGB O 65 FONT HALIGN 0 FONT 70 FONT HALIGN 1 FONT 75 FONT HALIGN 2 FONT 80 FONT HALIGN 0 FONT 85 FONT HALIGN 1 FONT 90 FONT HALIGN 2 FONT 95 FONT HALIGN 0 FONT 100 FONT HALIGN 1 FONT VALIGN 2 DRAW TEXT 0 160 229 MID TOP 105 9gFONT HALIGN 0 2 9 FONT VALIGN 0 2 DRAW TEXT 0 309 229 RIGHT TOP 110 GOTO 110 255 0 VALIGN 0 0 VALIGN 0 0 VALIGN 0 0 VALIGN 0 1 VALIGN 0 1 VALIGN 0 1 VALIGN 0 2 And the resulting screen display LINE 0 229 319 229 RGB 64 64 64 DRAW TEXT DRAW TEXT DRAW TEXT DRAW TEXT DRAW TEXT DRAW TEXT DRAW TEXT 0 10 10 LEFT BO
201. ic Reference at the end of this manual Let s try it PRINT ERR 0 Ready PRINT 5 Divide by zero error Ready PRINT ERR 6 Ready Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 38 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 The FIND function takes two arguments both strings It returns the zero based index of the second string in the first or 1 if the second string doesn t appear in the first string at all This will be very useful later when you re trying to manipulate strings in your programs Let s try it PRINT FIND Now is the time is 4 Ready PRINT FIND Now is the time Now 0 Ready PRINT FIND Now is the time country 1 Ready The GETCH function takes a number argument telling it how to behave then returns a number based upon the next character that is entered via the attached communications device If the argument is O the function returns 0 if no character is currently available otherwise it returns the ASCII decimal value of the character If the argument is non zero the function waits for the next character to be received when it then returns the ASCII decimal value of the character The HEX VAL function takes a string argument which it tries to interpret as hexadecimal value only characters 0 9 and A F a f If it successfully converts the hexadecimal string representation of a number to a value it returns that val
202. ight 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 123 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 MULMOD number multiplier divisor Returns 32 bit result of number multiplier divisor where number multiplier and divisor 64 bit internally Useful for calculating remainders of percentages etc where the normal multiply would overflow a signed 32 bit number RIGHT var len Returns a string containing the rightmost length characters of string variable TEST This 15 a string PRINT RIGHT TEST 6 string REPLACE var start var2 Returns a string variable with the contents of variable2 overwritten at zero based position start REM test replace s z ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ r replace REM replace at beginning PRINT REPLACE s 0 r REM replace in middle PRINT REPLACE s 13 r REM replace past end PRINT REPLACE s 30 r Ready run replaceHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ ABCDEFGHIJKLMreplaceUVWXYZ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZreplace Ready RND expr Returns a psuedo random number that ranges from 0 to expression 1 10 FOR i TO 10 PRINT RND 10 NEXT i Ready run 304383113 4 3 Ready SIN degrees Returns a scaled sine value of the degree argument where 1024 lt SIN lt 1024 The degree argument ranges from 0 360 and arguments larger than 360 degrees are converted modulo 360 SIN 0 0 SIN 90 1024 SIN 180 0 SI
203. ile to recordnumber x recordlength 0 lt recordnumber x recordlength lt 2 147 483 648 and records in the file after recordnumber are shifted down negative recordnumber seeks to the end of the file before inserting The data items inserted into the file are separated by commas with string values surrounded by double quotes The record is padded with spaces to recordlength including the trailing CR LF character pair which terminates each record e file may be viewed using the TYPE command type test dat Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 133 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 0 stre 1 str1 2 str2 3 str3 4 str4 5 str5 6 str6 7 str7 8 str8 9 str9 Ready list 10 LIF FILE EXISTS test dat 0 THEN PRINT no test dat END 20 1 20 test dat FINSERT 1 0 1 str STR 1 FINSERT 41 1 10 str STR 10 WHILE FEOF 1 0 40 FREAD 1 r Number String LIF FEOF 1 THEN PRINT Number String 1 60 WEND 70 CLOSE 1 Ready run 1 str 1 0 51 stri str2 str3 str4 str5 str6 str7 str8 str9 10 51 10 Ready WOAONDUBWNE FDELETE N recordnumber Removes fixed length record recordnumber 0 lt recordnumber x recordlength lt 2 147 483 648 on file N 0 9 opened by FOPEN N using a temporary file FDELETE TMP type test dat
204. into a O bit and vice versa Thus the value 1234 in binary bit form is Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1234 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 T Note that each bit position in the 1234 is inverted from their 1234 values Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 118 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 The bitwise amp operator is often used to mask off or clear some set of bits This can be used to determine which bits are set by amp ing a value with the mask of the bit to examine So the value 1234 bitwise amp with 255 is 210 Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1234 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 amp 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 210 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 The bitwise operator is used to turn on or set some set of bits So the value 1234 bitwise with 255 is 1279 Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1234 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1279 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The bitwise exclusive or operator sets a one in each bit position where its operands have different bits and zero where they are the same This can be used to
205. ints no connection 10 REM test socket sync listen 15 n recvdata senddata GOSUB 1000 GOTO 15 1000 REM listen subroutine 1002 PRINT listening 1005 ON SOCKET SYNC LISTEN 0 1000 connect recv send GOTO unknown ok no open connect recv err send err 1010 RETURN 1012 unknown PRINT unknown RETURN 1015 PRINT success RETURN 1020 no open PRINT can t open RETURN 1025 no connect PRINT no connection RETURN 1030 recv err PRINT error RETURN 1035 send err PRINT send error RETURN 1040 REM connect function 1045 FUNCTION connect 1050 PRINT connect 1055 ENDFUNCTION 1060 REM recv function 1065 FUNCTION recv 1070 1 FINPUT 0 n recvdata PRINT n 1075 ENDFUNCTION 1080 REM send function 1085 FUNCTION send 1090 send 1 senddata recvdata FPRINT 0 n senddata PRINT gt 1095 ENDFUNCTION Ready run listening no connection listening connect lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 5 gt lt 6 gt lt 7 gt lt 8 gt lt 9 gt lt 10 gt success listening connect lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 5 gt lt 6 gt lt 7 gt lt 8 gt lt 9 gt lt 10 gt success listening connect lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 5 gt lt 6 gt lt 7 gt lt 8 gt lt 9 gt lt 10 gt success listening connect lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 5 gt lt 6 gt lt 7 gt lt 8
206. is is shown in the following vars command output by the indentation 1285 stop list 10 REM function nesting 30 PRINT ten 2 999 END 1000 FUNCTION ten value 1010 nine value ten value nine PRINT nine 1020 ENDFUNCTION 1030 FUNCTION nine value 1040 eight value nine value eight PRINT eight 1050 ENDFUNCTION 1060 FUNCTION eight value 1070 seven value eight value seven PRINT seven 1080 ENDFUNCTION 1090 FUNCTION seven value 1100 six value seven value six PRINT six 1110 ENDFUNCTION 1120 FUNCTION six value 1130 five value six value five PRINT five 1140 ENDFUNCTION 1150 FUNCTION five value 1160 four value five value four PRINT four 1170 ENDFUNCTION Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 172 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 1180 FUNCTION four value 1190 three value four value three PRINT three 1200 ENDFUNCTION 1210 FUNCTION three value 1220 two value three value two PRINT two 1230 ENDFUNCTION 1240 FUNCTION two value 1250 one value two value one PRINT one 1260 ENDFUNCTION 1270 FUNCTION one value 1280 one value 1285 STOP 1290 ENDFUNCTION Ready run STOP in line 1285 Ready vars ten IntFunction nine IntFunction eight IntFunction seven IntFunction six IntFunction five IntFunction four IntFunction three
207. is system variable gets or sets the black replace color to be used for Scheme table entry SCHEME BCOLOR n RGB R B Where Field Description n Scheme table entry RGB R G B Black replacement color as RGB565 SCHEME WCOLOR n This system variable gets or sets the white replace color to be used for Scheme table entry n SCHEME WCOLOR n RGB R G B Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 91 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual Description Scheme table entry White replacement color as RGB565 Where Field n RGB R G B SCHEME COLORIZE n 8 September 2014 This system variable gets or sets the colorization mode to be used for Scheme table entry n Where SCHEME TEXTPOS n SCHEME COLORIZE n c Field Description n Scheme table entry 0 no change c 1 grayscale 2 shade This system variable gets or sets the text position to be used for this Scheme table entry n Where SCHEME TEXTPOS n p Field Description n Scheme table entry 0 no text 1 centered P 2 511 X Y position Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 92 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual SCHEME TRANSP n 8 September 2014 This system variable gets or sets the transparency mode to be used for Scheme table entry n SCHEME
208. its name including any extension and then the resource contents The entire Resource Table is protected by a cyclic redundancy check value of its contents Dynamically added resources are added to the front of the Resource Table Resource Table Table Size Size 16 LcdResource Size of ResourceNameO ext 0 ResourceNameO ext Contents Size of ResourceName1 ext ResourceName 1 ext ResourceName1 ext Contents s Size of ResourceNameN ext ResourceNameN ext ResourceNameN ext Contents Size 0 end of table CRC16 RESOURCES INIT Initializes the Resource table clearing all entries RESOURCES LIST pattern Prints a list of the current contents of the Resource table Wildcards and may be used in an optional pattern to select which resources are listed Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 152 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 RESOURCES FLASHERASE Erases the on board serial EEProm RESOURCES FLASHLOAD Initializes then loads the Resource table from the on board serial EEProm RESOURCES FLASHSTORE Saves the current contents of the Resource table to the on board serial EEProm RESOURCES LOAD filename bin Initializes then loads the Resource table from the binary file on t
209. l 8 September 2014 SEARCH string filename Direct mode only Performs a case insensitive search for the occurrence of the string displaying where it appears The search string can be a program statement keyword or contain and wildcard characters to match multiple variations of the search string e Ifthe optional filename is not present the currently loaded program is the search target for the occurrence of the search string displaying the lines where it appears Ifthe optional filename is present then that file becomes the search target and the file s lines are searched for the occurrence of the search string The optional filename can contain and wildcard characters to search multiple files SIGNAL systemvar Signal an event associated with System variable SORT var Sorts an array of strings or integers in ascending order Here s an example of sorting an integer array REM sorting integers CONST size 20 DIM a size FOR 0 TO size 1 a n RND 1000 NEXT PRINT before sort FOR 0 TO size 1 PRINT a n NEXT n SORT a PRINT PRINT after soft FOR TO size 1 PRINT a n NEXT n PRINT Ready run before sort 540 808 884 101 604 388 201 802 712 350 948 793 615 305 477 455 563 526 136 481 after soft 101 136 201 305 350 388 455 477 481 526 540 563 604 615 712 793 802 808 884 948 Ready And here s an example of sorting a string array
210. liderButton Red H 19x26 bmp 30 9SCHEME COLORIZE 0 0 9SCHEME TRANSP 0 0 SCHEME COLORIZE 1 SCHEME TRANSP 1 0 35 SCREEN OBJ SCHEME 0 0 40 2SCREEN 0BJ X 0 0 320 234 2 15 0 2 9 01 240 31 2 45 SCREENS CHANGETO 0 999 GOTO 999 Label Screen Object The Label screen object displays the object s TEXTS justified within the control s IMAGES bitmap resource The width and height of the displayed text area is controlled by the IMAGES width and height or it can be overridden via the WIDTH and HEIGHT values If no IMAGES bitmap resource is specified a box of the configured TPAD Scheme s off color is drawn if the object s SCHEME s FONT s background is not transparent Width BMP Resource SCREEN OBJ Height IMAGES 0 Untouched SCHEME 1 Touched SCREEN TEXTS Hello TOUCHED The position of the TEXT within the label boundary is controlled by the SCHEME font justification the object s scheme FONT HALIGN and FONT VALIGN properties IMAGES width or WIDTH gt HALIGN 0 HALIGN 1 HALIGN 2 VALIGN 2 VALIGN 2 VALIGN 2 TEXTS TEXTS TEXTS HALIGN 1 VALIGN 1 ES HALIGN 0 HALIGN 2 g vaugn 1 TEXTS TEXTS TEXTS Vauign 1 aS ead o TEXTS TEXTS TEXTS HALIGN 0 HALIGN 1 HALIGN 2 VALIGN 0 VALIGN 0 VALIGN 0 Copyri
211. linking on the screen which you may not want You can turn this off with another ANSI command ANSI CURSOR 0 REM Turn off ANSI cursor And if you PRINT on the bottom line of the screen without a trailing semi colon or if the text wraps to the next line the screen will scroll up You can turn these features off with another couple 9 ANSI commands ANSI WRAP 0 REM Turn off ANSI line wrap ANSI SCROLL 0 REM Turn off ANSI screen scrolling While this method of drawing text can be made to work the positioning is coarse the characters are always white on black and you are stuck with the character height and style that ANSI operation uses We ll examine an alternative text display method next which uses another DRAW command along with some additional system commands to control the text appearance row 18 fansi col 20 print Hello Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 58 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Drawing Text with Style The shape appearance and size of drawn text characters specify the text s style In computer terminology the style of text is referred to as a font The Color LCD and ACS Basic provide support for up to 32 different fonts to be in use at a time Each of the 32 fonts can be configured by your program to change the text color relative position and appearance The entries in this font table are accessed through system variabl
212. lone program monitoring it may be advantageous to record any program errors that occur to the SD card Then when the program stops running the SD card can be inserted into a PC card reader and the error that caused the program to stop can be examined The following code sets up ONERROR to transfer control to line 32000 where an ERRORS TXT file is opened for appended writing and the causal error message is written at the end of the file 10 REM Error Logging Example 20 ONERROR GOTO 32000 30 0 32000 OPEN 0 ERRORS TXT atw 32005 PRINT 0 ERR 32010 CLOSE 0 32015 STOP Ready run STOP in line 32015 Ready type errors txt Divide by zero error in line 30 Ready run STOP in line 32015 Ready type errors txt Divide by zero error in line 30 Divide by zero error in line 30 Ready Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 192 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Configuration Editor This example allows a user with a connected terminal emulator to edit the CFSound IV configuration settings Here is how it works Line 15 disables the MSG function so that the GETCH function will operate as required Line 20 initializes the current item and items variables then displays the menu Lines 22 through 35 comprise an infinite WHILE loop that retrieves information about the current item shows the item and processes any keys that are pressed Lines 8000 through
213. lor 7 Shadow RGB565 color to use as an Alpha multiplier Surface pixel RGB565 color image pixel surface pixel 1 image pixel surface pixel image is mask to apply multiplication of RGB565 color Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 164 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 SCHEMES Schemes are implemented to provide a common way to label and colorize all higher level screen objects such as buttons sliders and icons Schemes are used in pairs with the first element of the pair used for rendering the screen object when it isn t touched and the second used to render the object when it is touched The two replacement colors can provide colorization of gray scale buttons that changes when the buttons are touched and released The schemes are stored in a table and are referenced by the entry number There sixteen entries in the Schemes table yielding eight scheme pairs Scheme Table Scheme 00 Black Replace Color White Replace Color Font Number Colorize Text Position Transparency Scheme 01 TIPP Scheme 02 13 N Scheme 14 Black Replace Color White Replace Color Font Number Colorize Text Position Transparency Font Table Font 00 Font 01 Font 02 Font 29 Font 30 Sch
214. lso be cleared by assigning it a string value which is not saved MSGENABLE This system variable controls whether the serial data stream is parsed for messages as outlined in the MSG description above The ability to disable MSG processing is required to support the GETCHO function on the serial port It defaults to 1 enabled DMX These system variables are used to access the DMX512 functionality DMX RESET Writing this system variable to a non zero value resets the DMX Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 82 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 DMX MASTER Writing this system variable to a non zero value enables the optional DMX as a master controller if present A value of zero enables sets slave device mode DMX DATA x Gets or sets the current value of channel x 0 lt x lt 511 if the optional DMX I O module is present EOT This system variable returns 1 when any serial data sent by BASIC console operation or PRINT or LCDx statements has finished transmitting It can be cleared by setting it to zero but will immediately return 1 again unless serial data is sending SMTP These system variables are used to provide events and status when sending e mail via the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP SMTP EVENT This system variable reflects the last SMTP event SMTP EVENT Event 0 None 1 Status Up
215. may be processed and listing their relative priority Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 127 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Statements ACS Basic program lines consist of an optional integer line number followed by one or more statements Multiple statements on a line are allowed separated by a colon Only the first statement on a line may have a line number A Direct mode of operation is available for some statements when they are entered without a line number and are executed immediately Here are some sample program statements 10 REM This is a comment 20 FOR I 10 PRINT I NEXT I The statement keywords are tokenized when entered to save program memory and speed program execution ie the keyword GOSUB would be tokenized to a single byte instead of five bytes In addition the statement line numbers are converted to a four byte unsigned integer form to save space and facilitate program execution Saved programs are expanded un tokenized on the SD card to allow program storage viewing and editing with an external text editor if required The following statement keywords are supported BREAK line BREAK label Program mode only Exits from within FOR NEXT or WHILE WEND loops execution continues after the closest NEXT or WEND statement If the optional line or label is present execution continues there 10 REM for break next t
216. n implicit priority with higher priority events being able to interrupt execution of lower priority event handlers Here s an example of touch event handling 100 REM Test Touch Events 110 ONEVENT TOUCH EVENT GOSUB 1000 130 GOTO 130 1000 T TOUCH EVENT X TOUCH X Y TOUCH Y 1010 ON T GOTO 1015 1020 1025 1030 1015 RETURN 1020 PRINT Touch X Y RETURN 1025 PRINT Move 3X3 RETURN 1030 PRINT Release X Y RETURN 1035 RETURN Ready This would print Touch x Move a x y or Release x on the screen as the user interacts with the touchscreen In order to handle an event synchronously a program may wait for an event to occur by using the WAIT statement Program execution stalls at that statement until the specified event happens Alternatively the program may poll the associated system variable s value in a loop looking for the event to have been signaled Here s an example of polling for the SECOND system variable to change 10 REM poll SECOND 15 Seconds SECOND 20 LIF Seconds LastSeconds THEN PRINT Seconds LastSeconds Seconds 25 GOTO 15 Ready ESC at line 15 Ready This would print the value of SECOND every time it changes The SIGNAL statement may be used in a program to force an event to happen It is very important to note that the ONEVENT handler subroutine executes in the context of the running program it has access to all program varia
217. n what they are pre defined to do and what arguments that they may require to do it 2 When calling a function the function name must be immediately followed by the opening parenthesis surrounding the function s arguments 3 The type of a function is identified by the name just like a variable A Casual Remark The REM command allows you to put notes REMarks into your programs The REM command actually does nothing when ACS Basic sees the REM command it skips over the rest of the line In computer terminology the use of the REM command is referred to as commenting your code It serves a couple of purposes reminding yourself about what you were trying to do with this code and documenting what you hope that it does as an aid for others While it doesn t seem important now with these tiny programs it will become increasingly important when the programs get larger and you have many more of them to keep track of It s considered good practice 10 REM This is a comment line Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 37 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Let s examine some of these functions We will group them by what type of value they will return numeric or string Functions Returning a Number You ve already seen one of these type of functions RND Remember it took a numeric argument and returned a numeric value Here are some others The ASC function
218. nK4 bmp 3 018 builtin ButtonM bmp 2 618 builtin Ready Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 59 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 So there are at least two embedded font files to work with that are built in How can we use these to draw text on the screen Let s look using the FONTS commands There s a Table of Fonts Just like with the resources there is a FONTS LIST command Try it fonts list Resource Name BCOLOR FCOLOR SPACINGX SPACINGY HALIGN VALIGN BTRANS AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 0 0 RGB 255 255 255 AcsAnsiFont efnt RGB 0 0 RGB 255 255 255 AcsAnsiFont efnt RGB 255 255 255 RGB 0 0 6 AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 0 RGB AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 0 RGB 255 255 255 AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 0 RGB 255 255 255 AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 0 RGB 255 255 255 AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 0 RGB AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 0 RGB 255 255 255 AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 0 RGB AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 0 RGB 255 255 255 AcsDefaultFont efnt 0 RGB AcsDefaultFont efnt 0 RGB 255 255 255 AcsDefaultFont efnt 0 RGB AcsDefaultFont efnt 0 RGB 255 255 255 AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 0 0 AcsDefaultFont efnt px RGB 255 255 255 AcsDefaultFont efnt j RGB 0 0 0 AcsDefaultFont efnt RGB 255 2
219. named without a trailing dollar sign Rules for String Data 1 Any data in quotes is String Data 2 String Data may only be assigned to variable name with a trailing dollar sign Variable Rules 1 You may use multiple characters from the upper case letters A Z the lower case letters a z the numbers 0 9 and the _ underscore character for variable names 2 The first character of the name must be a letter not a number or underscore Variable names are case sensitive Aname is not the same as aNAME 4 Variables whose names end with a dollar sign can only hold String Data otherwise they can only hold Numeric Data The list of current variables can be shown with the VARS command 6 Short concise variable names take less memory and work slightly faster W n Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 20 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Remembering Commands First we need to erase everything that the Color LCD has remembered so far Type NEW Now type this command line Be sure and type the number 10 first 10 PRINT Hello from the Color LCD Notice that this time when you pressed nothing appeared to have happened Not that you can immediately see What you did was to type your first program Type RUN ve The display now runs your program You can type RUN again and again You can also type run ACS Basic s commands are not case sensitive just
220. nation of zero or more style bits that are or ed together 0 7 1 Chord 2 No Fill 4 Edged Here s a program to show the effect of the various combinations of the style bits 10 30 40 60 80 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 999 REM arc demo 20 QANSI REM draw grid 64 TO 256 STEP 64 DRAW LINE x 0 x 239 RGB 64 64 64 NEXT x 80 TO 160 STEP 80 DRAW LINE 0 y 319 y RGB 64 64 64 NEXT y REM init text font 70 FONT REM draw eight styles of filled arcs 90 DRAW ARC FILLED 64 80 80 80 45 135 RGB 255 0 0 0 FOR x FOR y DRAW DRAW DRAW DRAW DRAW DRAW DRAW DRAW DRAW DRAW DRAW DRAW DRAW DRAW DRAW GOTO ENABLE 0 HALIGN 0 1 QGFONT VALIGN O 2 TEXT 0 64 80 Style 0 QFONT FCOLOR 0 RGB 255 255 255 ARC FILLED 128 80 80 80 45 135 RGB 255 0 0 1 TEXT 0 128 80 Style 1 ARC FILLED 192 80 80 80 45 135 RGB 255 0 0 2 TEXT 0 192 80 Style 2 ARC FILLED 256 80 80 80 45 135 RGB 255 0 0 3 TEXT 0 256 80 Style 3 ARC FILLED 64 160 80 80 45 135 RGB 255 0 0 4 TEXT 0 64 160 Style 4 ARC FILLED 128 160 80 80 45 135 RGB 255 0 0 5 TEXT 0 128 160 Style 5 ARC FILLED 192 160 80 80 45 135 RGB 255 0 0 6 TEXT 0 192 160 Style 6 ARC FILLED 256 160 80 80 45 135 RGB 255 0 0 7 TEXT 0 256 160 Style 7 999 Style 4 Style 5 Style 6 Style 7 Style 0 Style 1 Style 2 Style 3 Copyright 2010 2014 by AC
221. nd x2 y2 using color DRAW BOX DASHED y1 x2 y2 color pattern scale Draws a dashed line box with corners at x1 yl and x2 y2 using color Each bit in the pattern is used scale times to draw the pixels in the box lines a pattern of 21845 hex 5555 binary 0101010101010101 with a scale of 4 would draw the box using 4 pixel dashes 4 pixels apart Here s a sample that draws a crawling ants flashing line around a bitmap button 10 REM DRAW BOX DASHED demo 15 ANSI ENABLE 0 BACKLIGHT 1 20 xc 160 yc 120 BITMAP WIDTH ButtonK4 bmp h BITMAP HEIGHT ButtonK4 bmp 25 SURFACE 2 DRAW BITMAP xc w 2 yc h 2 ButtonK4 bmp SURFACE 1 30 blx xc w 2 2 bly yc h 2 2 bux xc w 2 2 buy yc h 2 2 35 ONEVENT 0 GOSUB 1000 40 QTIMER O 10 45 GOTO 45 1000 DRAW COPY 2 blx bly blx bly w 4 h 4 1005 IF pattern HEX VAL 5555 THEN pattern HEX VAL AAAA ELSE pattern HEX VAL 5555 1010 DRAW BOX DASHED blx bly bux buy RGB 255 0 0 pattern 4 1020 DRAW TOGGLE 1025 TIMER 10 1030 RETURN And the resulting screen display DRAW BOX FILLED x2 y1 y2 color Draws a filled box with corners at x1 y1 and x2 y2 using color DRAW CIRCLE x y r color Draws a circle centered at x y of radius r using color DRAW ELLIPSE x y width height color Draws an ellipse centered at x y of width and height using color DRAW E
222. ndicatorZero 50 SCREEN OBJ OPTION Knob IndicatorWidth 5 SCREEN OBJ OPTION Knob MinValue SCREEN OBJ OPTION Knob MinAngle 225 SCREEN OBJ OPTION Knob MaxValue 100 SCREEN OBJ OPTION Knob MaxAngle 45 CONST Readout 1 SCREEN OBJ TYPE Readout Label SCREEN OBJ X Readout 160 25 SCREEN OBJ Y Readout 220 SCREEN OBJ WIDTH O Readout 50 SCREEN OBJ HEIGHT Readout 20 SCREEN OBJ MASK Knob ValueChanged SCREEN OBJ MASK Readout None ONEVENT SCREEN OBJ EVENT GOSUB 10000 SCREENS CHANGETO 0 WAIT SCREEN EVENT SCREEN OBJ VALUE Knob e GOTO 120 10000 REM screen object event handler 10005 SCREEN OBJ TEXT Readout STR SCREEN OBJ VALUE Knob 10010 RETURN And the result is Textbox Object The Textbox screen object displays the object s TEXTS justified within the control s IMAGES bitmap resource The width and height of the displayed text area is controlled by the IMAGE width and height or it can be overridden via the WIDTH and HEIGHT values If no IMAGES bitmap resource is specified a box of the configured TPAD Scheme s off color is drawn outlined by a box of the configured TPAD Scheme s on color if the object s SCHEME s FONT s background is not transparent The justification and color of the object s TEXT value is controlled by the font specified object s SCHEME pair unfocused is drawn using the first scheme in the pair focused is dra
223. ne six 90 items 6 this is line seven items 7 this is line eight items 8 this is line nine 95 SCREEN OBJ DATA LBox items jSCREEN OBJ OPTION 0 LBox NumberOflItems UBOUND items 100 ONEVENT SCREEN OBJ EVENT GOSUB Handler 105 SCREENS CHANGETO 110 WAIT SCREEN EVENT 115 SCREEN OBJ VALUE LBox 1 REM nothing selected 999 GOTO 999 1000 Handler REM screen object event handler 1005 LIF SCREEN OBJ LBox THEN ON SCREEN OBJ EVENT 1 GOTO 0 Selector 1010 RETURN 1015 Selector IF SCREEN OBJ VALUE LBox gt THEN 1020 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 0 Readout items SCREEN OBJ VALUE LBox selected 1025 ELSE 1030 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 0 Readout nothing selected 1035 ENDIF 1040 RETURN And here is the resulting display Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 105 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 this is line one this is line one this is line seven this is line two I eight this is line three this is line nine this is line two this is line three this is line four this is line four Spinner Knob Object The Spinner Knob screen object displays a rotary knob with a smaller spinner handle or radial indicator line The slider uses two bitmap resources configured with the IMAGES and OVERLAYS The IMAGES bitmap resource supplies the base rotary know and the OVERLAY bitmap resource supplies the spinner handle
224. need a power source and optionally a communications device The power source provides the power that the display requires for its operation The communications device allows you to interact with the built in ACS Basic language to develop and test your applications Powering the Color LCD The Color LCD can be powered in three different ways The display requires a source of power to operate There are three ways to power the display 1 Using a couple of pins on the SERIAL connector to connect an external power supply 2 Using a USB connection to supply power 3 Using the optional Power Over Ethernet POE module and an external Ethernet power injection module WARNING Do not install the USB POWER jumper if powering the display through the SERIAL connector or external Ethernet power injection module High voltage will be injected back through your USB cable to the host computer Let s look at each of these options in more detail Via SERIAL Connector with ACS Power Injector This consists of a back to back pair of DB 9 serial connectors with a wall transformer The Color LCD can be powered through two pins on its SERIAL connector This injector supplies that power while allowing the other serial connector pins to pass through to your application cabling and hardware ACS LCD Power Injector Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 11 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Via U
225. ng for INPUT the double key is sufficient to ESCape the program Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 22 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Changing your Program So how can you modify your program without typing NEW and starting over each time To replace an existing program line simply type the new line using the same line number at the beginning of the line you want to replace Type 50 GOTO 40 Your program should now look like 50 GOTO 40 LIST 10 PRINT Hello from the Color LCD 20 PRINT What s your name 30 INPUT Name 40 PRINT Hi Name 50 GOTO 40 Ready This program change modifies the loop to not ask the question over and over Instead the program now just keeps repeatedly PRINTing the Name that you INPUT the first time Press the key twice in a row to ESCape the program when you ve seen enough Notice that you don t need to press the key to ESCape this time because the display is not waiting for INPUT RUN Hello from the Color LCD What s your name Steve Hi Steve Hi Steve Hi Steve Hi Steve Hi Steve Hi Steve Hi Steve Hi Steve Hi Steve Hi Steve s ESC at line 40 Ready To remove a line from your program simply type the line number followed by the key This erases that line from your program Type 50 im This removes line 50 from your program 50 LIST 10 PRINT Hello from the Color LCD
226. nt Touch x y Move x or Release x y on the screen as the user interacts with the touchscreen In order to handle an event synchronously a program may wait for an event to occur by using the WAIT statement Program execution stalls at that statement until the specified event happens Alternatively the program may poll the associated system variable s value in a loop looking for the event to have been signaled Here s an example of polling for the 9 SECOND system variable to change 10 REM poll SECOND 15 Seconds SECOND 20 LIF Seconds LastSeconds THEN PRINT Seconds LastSeconds Seconds 25 GOTO 15 Ready ESC at line 15 Ready This would print the value of SECOND every time it changes The SIGNAL statement may be used in a program to force an event to happen It is very important to note that the ONEVENT handler subroutine executes in the context of the running program it has access to all program variables Since the event handler may be executed at any time in between any program statements care should be used when changing program variables from within an event handler as it may cause unexpected results in the execution of other program statements that may be using and depending upon the values of those same variables Incorrect or unexpected program execution may result code event handlers carefully See the ONEVENT statement definition below for a table showing what events
227. nts the current value of the incrementing variable a and then starts the connection again SOCKET EVENT 0 handler subroutine in lines 1020 1055 print the result of the SOCKET ASYNC LISTEN statement and set the done flag variable The RUN shows the connections each interspersed with the incrementing variable s current value showing that program execution continues outside of the socket connection 10 REM test socket async listen 20 ONEVENT SOCKET EVENT 0 GOSUB 1020 25 0 senddata recvdata done 0 GOSUB 1000 30 a 1 LIF done 1 THEN PRINT GOTO 25 35 GOTO 30 1000 REM connection subroutine 1005 PRINT listening 1010 SOCKET ASYNC LISTEN 0 1000 connect recv send 1015 RETURN 1020 ON SOCKET EVENT 0 GOTO _ connect send err recv err 1025 RETURN 1030 PRINT unknown done 1 RETURN 1035 ok PRINT disconnect done 1 RETURN 1040 no open PRINT can t open done 1 RETURN 1045 no connect PRINT no connection done 1 RETURN 1050 send err PRINT send error done 1 RETURN 1055 recv err PRINT recv error done 1 RETURN 1060 REM connect function 1065 FUNCTION connect 1070 PRINT connect 1075 ENDFUNCTION 1080 REM send function 1085 FUNCTION send 1090 send 1 senddata recvdata FPRINT 0 n senddata PRINT gt 1095 ENDFUNCTION
228. o loop using the GOTO command And a running program may be ESCaped to stop Another way to control the execution of a program is to GOTO only if a certain condition is met Let s change our program so that it stops if we enter a blank name Modify line 40 to remove the trailing comma by typing 40 PRINT Hi Name m Now replace line 50 with new IF THEN command The new IF THEN command evaluates a condition and IF the condition is True THEN it executes the command after the THEN Otherwise execution continues with the following program line Type 50 IF Name lt gt THEN GOTO 20 In this example the IF condition that is being evaluated is Name lt gt Name is the variable that receives your INPUT up until the key The gt less than greater than stands for not equal to and the is an empty string a string with no characters in it So your program should now look like LIST 10 PRINT Hello from the Color LCD 20 PRINT What s your name 30 INPUT Name 40 PRINT Hi Name 50 IF Name THEN GOTO 20 Ready Run the program Try entering your name the first time your program asks for it then the next time simply press the E key Notice how the program loops back to line 20 when your name was INPUT otherwise the program stops RUN Hello from the Color LCD What s your name Steve Hi Steve What s your name gt Enter lt Hi Ready Copyri
229. o operation 32 list 138 operator precedence 33 list to file 138 operators 32 resequence 144 programming 17 retrieve from card 138 screen coordinates 50 run 144 subroutines 44 save to card 144 unary operators 32 search and replace 128 variables 20 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP Computer Terminology send command 146 147 client server 178 server command 145 format specification 121 Sockets socket programming 178 async connect 148 DMX async listen 148 system variables 82 asynchronous 180 Errors communication protocol 182 force 130 examples 183 one shot handling 140 sync connect 124 Events sync listen 125 overview 168 synchronous 179 signaling 145 Variables smtp 83 array definition 130 sockets 81 array sorting 145 waiting for 149 clearing 128 Files constants 129 card directory 130 display table 149 card directory to file 130 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 199 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
230. oading the table and what screen entry to change to push to or pop from Screens are not stored fully rendered in memory but are constructed drawn when navigated to Scheming Controls The Schemes table holds information about how to draw and colorize images and display text Screen Objects can reference Scheme table entries to control how they are drawn and colored as well as how any text that they display is rendered Scheme table entries are usually used in pairs with the lower numbered entry used to render an un touched control and the higher numbered entry used to render a control that is touched In the previous section we drew a built in keypad button bitmap that was drawn as grayscale only shades of black to white were used The Screens Framework s use of schemes allows these buttons and their text to be colorized and the color to change as the buttons are pressed and Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 71 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 released This provides an easy way to accomplish a common look and feel for screen objects with the ability to easily change their appearance from one place We ll examine schemes a little later on Controlling Screens and Objects The Screen table elements are accessed using indexed system variables the SCREEN prefix is followed by one or more selectors using the dot notation to select which entry s elemen
231. oceret terre reet eee rre tei no irem e aa 187 Setting the Real Time Clock oo eie bU pre terere Me erbe 187 Displaying an Animated Radial Gauge 188 Displaying an Animated Analog Clock sese 190 Fixed Length Record e tT rto e He E ie te 191 Error Logging iere dta e o a ene ite eb 192 Configuration Editor oe Ere ti cond E gie Eee Eier ts 193 EEG T 197 yD 199 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Welcome Newbies If you don t know anything about programming computers relax we will try and make it simple Using this manual as a guide you ll be able to interact and use your ACS Color LCD Display right away So sit down and spend a couple of hours with this manual and the display Interact with it Get comfortable with them Once you learn how to program the sky is the limit And Hello Programmers If you already know how to program then turn to the ACS Basic Reference and ACS Basic Examples sections toward the end of this manual There are summaries of the ACS Basic commands statements functions operators and other programming elements that are supported To Get Started In order to start using the Color LCD you will
232. ommand draw bitmap 160 120 ButtonK4 bmp Your screen should now look like Ready w bitmap 160 120 Buttonk4 bmp Surprise The image looks like the Configuration Settings screen keypad spacebar without any colors Why isn t it shown in the center of the screen at 160 120 This is because the DRAW BITMAP coordinates reference where the lower left corner of the bitmap image will be drawn The ButtonK4 bmp Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 63 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 happens to be 88 pixels wide by 22 pixels tall So we could center it by subtracting half of these values from the x and y coordinates Let s try moving it type the following command draw bitmap 160 88 2 120 22 2 ButtonK4 bmp Your screen should now look like bitmap 160 120 ButtonK4 bmp w bitmap 160 88 2 120 22 2 ButtonK4 bmp e Notice that it is centered now and also that it was drawn on top of what was already there like stacking photos The effect of all of the DRAW commands is cumulative each one builds upon the resulting image There are additional variations on the DRAW BITMAP command that support transparency and indexing These are outlined in the ACS Basic Reference section of this manual Rules for Drawing 1 DRAWing commands use x horizontal and y vertical coordinates to control where they affect the screen 2 Graphic DRA
233. ork that ACS Color Basic has the commands and system variables to interact with There s a Table of Screens Earlier we saw how embedded fonts and bitmap images were accessed using Resources and the Font table The Screens Framework adds two more tables to the mix a Screen table and a Scheme table The Screen table holds information about how to draw each Screen entry and what controls Screen Objects each Screen uses The Screen table currently holds sixteen Screen entries and each Screen entry currently holds up to thirty two Screen Object entries Screen Object entries define what type of object button slider gauge label etc how it is rendered images scheme text options where it is positioned in relationship to the containing screen what value it has and other information used to interact with the user and running program Here s a diagram Background Image X Y d Object 0 Screen Object i 5 E pue T 01 i aoe Screen 1 EN Object 31 Screen 02 E J gt Screen 13 Screen 14 oe ZUM Back 1 Screen 15 ackground Image i Y N Object 0 N Object 1 5 Object 31 ACS Color Basic has system variables to access the elements of the Screen table and commands to persist and navigate the table saving and l
234. osition is set past the current size of the file FEOFT N The FEOF N system variable allows the ACS Basic program to determine when end of file has occurred after an FOPEN N INPUT N FREAD N or FINPUT N statement Optionally an event handler specified with the ONEVENT statement may be activated upon an end of file occurring Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 80 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 SOCKET EVENT N The SOCKET EVENTT N system variable allows the ACS Basic program to determine the state of an opened streaming socket connection Optionally an event handler specified with the ONEVENT statement may be activated when an SOCKET EVENT occurs The SOCKET EVENT values are Event Description 0 None No event 1 Disconnect Done Socket disconnected connection done 2 Failed Open SOCKET N failed to open 3 Connection No connection to socket within SOCKET TIMEOUT N 4 Data Sent Timeout No send data acknowledgment within SOCKET TIMEOUT N 5 Data Received Timeout No received data within SOCKET TIMEOUT N SOCKET TIMEOUT N This system variable allows the ACS Basic program to control the timeout period of socket connection send data and receive data phases SECOND MINUTE HOUR DOW DATE MONTH YEAR These system variables allow the ACS Basic program to access the Real Time Clock
235. ot Eee oO AA AAS 149 TYPE esu nU Edo m uuu 149 eae NIRE EE ADS 149 WAIT ee e dete re pe eet ce dee ep tetera 149 WHILE test statements gt WEND iecit rtt th HR PE PR 150 Display Statements eerte ree HH EHE RE tereti E pese SE lE tereti eget 152 RESOURCES 2 sss Pede p idee eder ipte dene eder dtp dete rei ee eee 152 RESOURGES INIT tno Rp EE ee ted ep obere 152 RESQURCES LIST p ttern 3 ti ete ee E rede 152 RESOURCES ELASHERASE 5 eden pe eee anode aa are ten eA 153 RESOURCES FLASHLOAD x end d e eeu bee o ei tdg 153 RESOURCES FLASHSTORE scssssssseccessvenevecssseseveceecsoteaserecssesseaveneacenceoesenesessasenevasenenes 153 RESOURCES LOAD filename bin 153 RESOURCES SAVE filename bin 153 RESOURCES ADD filename e rr tet hr Pee itt ret 153 RESOURCES REMOVE resourceName esses enne nennen entente entere 153 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 RESOURCES EXTRACT et tette ete ine Rr e euin 153 Initial Resource Table Load esses eene eene entente enne enne 154 n rear meri ria mute Sade ca eee ak eis ie 155 FONTSANIT ES 155 FONT
236. ou put the quotation marks where they were shown If you made a mistake simply press the key and the last character that you typed will disappear You can backspace over the entire line if necessary Your PC and display screen should look like this Ready PRINT Hello World Now press the key and see what happens Your screen should now look like this Ready PRINT Hello World Hello World Ready The Color LCD display executed the command that you entered by printing the message that you had in quotes Now let s try another command PRINT 2 2 The Color LCD executes your command by printing 2 2 Ready If you expected to see the number four then try removing the quotation marks PRINT 2 2 me The Color LCD executes your command by printing 4 Ready The Color LCD sees everything that you type as either Strings or Numbers If it s in quotes it s a String and the display sees it exactly as it was typed If it s not in quotes it s a Number The Color LCD will Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 17 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 figure it out like a numerical problem It it s not in quotes the display can interpret it by adding subtracting multiplying or dividing it Let s try a multiplication problem PRINT 1589 2 m PRINT 1589 2 3178 Ready The Color LCD uses an asterisk as a multiplication sign rather
237. ption 0 Unknown No Status 1 Disconnect Done No Error 2 n a the open was done initially 3 Connection Timeout no connection within the SOCKET TIMEOUTT N interval Data Send Timeout no send data acknowledgment within the SOCKET TIMEOUTT A N interval Receive Data Timeout no received data within the SOCKET TIMEOUTT N interval Server Non blocking Listen The asynchronous socket server listen takes the form SOCKET ASYNC LISTEN N connect recv send N File number port String representation of IPv4 address and TCP IP port number connect User function called when connection occurs recv User function called to receive data from file N send User function called to send data to file N The SOCKET ASYNC LISTEN statement opens a TCP IP port as an open file N using the port string If this is successful execution continues with the following program statements e When a remote client establishes a connection to the listening port the user provided connect function is called e When this function returns the user provided recv function is called to input data from the remote device using INPUT N or FINPUT N statements The recv function should return one to send more data two to receive more data or zero to disconnect e Next the user provided send function is called to output data to
238. r 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 In computer terminology these named memory locations are referred to as variables The Color LCD keeps track of these variables and their current values for you You can ask it for a list of what variables it is currently remembering by typing the command VARS And the display will show the variables that we ve used so far along with their current contents R W Int R W Int C2 R W Int LongName R W Int A R W Str B R W Str Ready Remember this for me The R W indicates that the variable can be both Read from and Written to Later on we will see how to make variables Read Only The Int indicates that the display understands this variable to be for holding Numbers Str indicates that the variable holds strings And of course the Color LCD is picky about what is stored in the two types of variables Try typing these lines 6 6 D 6 E With both of these lines the display responds with an error message D 6 Wrong expression type error can t assign string to numeric var Ready D 6 Wrong expression type error can t assign number to string var Ready In computer terminology setting variables to values is referred to as assigning a value to a variable There are four fundamental rules for variable value assignment Rules for Numeric Data 1 Numbers not in quotes are Numeric Data 2 Numeric Data can only be assigned to variables
239. r the CFSound IV an Invalid WAV File Error is generated File may be a constant string or you can use a string variable as the file by concatenating it to such a string PLAY PATH While the sound file is playing e Events can occur during the PLAY statement but any defined ONEVENT handlers will not be executed until the sound has finished playing e play sounds while continuing program execution use the SOUNDS system variable PRINT expr expr S PRINT expr expr 3 Prints one or more expression s to the serial port e Ifthe expressions are separated by a comma then a space is output in between e Ifthe expressions are separated by a semicolon then no space is output e If the statement ends in a comma or semicolon no Carriage Return Line Feed pair is appended to the printed expressions allowing multiple print statements to display on the same line When ANSILENABLE 1 the PRINT statement is also shown on the CFSound virtual display as drawn ANSI text See the ANSI Mode for information on how the text is rendered on the CFSound Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 142 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 PRINT N expr expr PRINT N expr expr Prints one or more expressions to a previously opened file or internet streaming handle N 0 9 The same formatting conditions as
240. r zero to disconnect The process repeats between recv and send calls until one of the functions returns zero or an error condition occurs The SOCKET SYNC LISTEN function then returns a numeric value representing the result of the connection SOCKET SYNC LISTEN Description returns 0 Unknown No Status 1 Disconnect Done No Error 2 Open Error requested file N failed to open 3 Connection Timeout no connection within the SOCKET TIMEOUTT N interval 4 Data Send Timeout no send data acknowledgment within the SOCKET TIMEOUTT HN interval 5 Receive Data Timeout no received data within the GSOCKET TIMEOUT ZN interval Non blocking Sockets Asynchronous or non blocking sockets are implemented using a statement to start the communication user functions to control the order and flow of data and a system variable to return the result of the connection The user defined functions are called in between other program statements that are executing to provide control points during the socket operation There are two statements to start the asynchronous socket communication Client Non blocking Connection The asynchronous client connection is started using the following program statement SOCKET ASYNC CONNECT N ip port connect send recv N File number ip port String representation of IPv4 address and TCP IP port number connect
241. rawing alternates between two different surfaces one is shown while drawing on the other then they are switched and the process repeats The Color LCD actually has three drawing surfaces to support this approach Display Work and Background The Background surface provides a content area Background Surface 2 that can be seldom drawn and copied to the Work surface before additional drawing is done on top gt Work Surface 1 The Work surface is where most drawing is done before being swapped with the Display surface Display Surface 0 shown on LCD The Display surface is the one that is currently being shown on the LCD This is the one that we have been drawing on up to now All of the DRAW commands operate on the current drawing surface which is set using a system variable SURFACE The DRAW TOGGLE command is used to swap the work and display surfaces they aren t copied the work surface becomes the display and the old display becomes the work surface In order to implement double buffering and avoid flickering as the display is updated we need to change our program to use the following sequence Double Buffering Sequence 1 Switch to the Background draw surface 2 Draw any required static background content 3 Switch to the Work surface 4 Copy in the content from the Background surface to the Work surface and draw any dynamic content on top of it
242. records on ZN 0 9 opened by FOPEN N into the list of variables Before the data is read the file is positioned to the desired recordnumber by positioning the file to recordnumber x recordlength 0 lt recordnumber x recordlength lt 2 147 483 648 A negative recordnumber seeks to the end of the file e Reading at the current end of the file sets the FEOF N system variable and signals the associated event Note that when an end of file occurs the variables will have their last value from a prior successful FREAD e Reading past the current end of the file generates a FREAD record Out of Range error e data items in the file are separated by commas with string values surrounded by double quotes If the data in the file ends before all of the variables have been assigned values an Out of Data Error occurs Incorrect data formatting in the file can cause a Syntax Error to occur 10 LIF FILE EXISTS test dat 0 THEN PRINT no test dat END 20 1 20 test dat 30 r 0 WHILE FEOF 1 0 40 FREAD 1 r Number String 50 LIF FEOF 1 THEN PRINT Number String 1 60 70 CLOSE 1 Ready type test dat 0 stro 1 stri 2 str2 3 str3 4 str4 5 str5 6 str6 7 str7 8 str8 9 str9 Ready run 51 stri str2 str3 str4 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 132 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual
243. rent A bounding box of the WIDTH and HEIGHT is then drawn in the configured TPAD Scheme s on color The number of displayed items and the topmost item in the list may be controlled by OPTION properties An item may be selected or deselected by touching The object s VALUE reflects the selected item number with minus one 1 indicating no item is selected Here s a short program that displays a listbox control with some character strings that displays the selected item at the top of the screen in a label control 10 REM listbox 15 ANSI ENABLE 0 BACKLIGHT 1 20 INCLUDE constants bas 25 CONST LBox 0 SCREEN OBJ TYPE LBox Listbox 30 REM QSCREEN OBJ IMAGE O0 0 PopUp 160x120 bmp 35 FONT HALIGN 8 0 FONT HALIGN 9 0 SCREEN OBJ SCHEME 0 8 40 FONT FCOLOR 9 RGB 255 255 0 45 SCREEN OBJ X 0 LBox ScreenWidth 2 160 2 SCREEN OBJ Y LBox ScreenHeight 2 120 2 50 SCREEN OBJ WIDTH 0 LBox 160 SCREEN OBJ HEIGHT LBox 90 55 CONST Readout 1 SCREEN OBJ TYPE Readout Label 60 SCREEN OBJ X Readout 160 100 SCREEN OBJ Y Readout 220 65 SCREEN OBJ WIDTH Readout 200 SCREEN OBJ HEIGHT Readout 20 70 SCREEN OBJ MASK Readout None 75 DIM items 9 80 0 this is line one items 1 this is line two items 2 this is line three 85 items 3 this is line four items 4 this is line five items 5 this is li
244. rent drawing SURFACE using color and here s a program to draw a yellow circle centered on the screen 10 REM Draw a blue box around the screen edge 15 ANSI ENABLE 0 20 DRAW FILL 0 0 320 240 RGB 0 0 0 25 DRAW CIRCLE 160 120 100 RGB 255 255 0 30 GOTO 30 Drawing Ellipses How about drawing an Ellipse Here s the command format DRAW ELLIPSE x y width height color x center x coordinate 0 319 y center y coordinate 240 width major axis width height minor axis width color RGB565 ellipse pixels color Draws a width by height ellipse centered at x y on the current drawing SURFACE to color and here s a program to draw a magenta ellipse centered on the screen 10 REM Draw a blue box around the screen edge 15 ANSI ENABLE 0 20 DRAW FILL 0 0 320 240 RGB 0 0 0 25 DRAW ELLIPSE 160 120 100 50 RGB 255 0 255 30 GOTO 30 If you want a filled ellipse change line 25 25 DRAW ELLIPSE FILLED 160 120 100 50 RGB 255 0 255 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 56 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Drawing Polygons A polygon is a flat shape consisting of straight lines that are joined to form a closed chain A triangle is just a 3 sided polygon a box is a 4 sided polygon with right angles between the sides An N sided polygon requires N coordinate pairs for its vertices How can we format a polygon draw command
245. ress and TCP IP port number connect User function called when connection occurs send User function called to send data to file N User function called to receive data from file N The SOCKET SYNC CONNECT function opens the TCP IP network connection as an open file N to the remote device using the ip port string When the connection is established the user provided connect function is called e When this function returns the user provided send function is called to output data to the remote device using PRINT N or FPRINT N statements The send function should return one to wait for received data two to send more data or zero to disconnect e Next the user provided recv function is called to input data from the remote device using INPUT N or FINPUT N statements The recv function should return one to send more data two to receive more data or zero to disconnect The process repeats between send and recv calls until one of the functions returns zero or an error condition occurs The SOCKET SYNC CONNECTT function then returns a numeric value representing the result of the connection SOCKET SYNC CONNECT RE NEN Description 0 Unknown No Status 1 Disconnect Done No Error 2 Open Error requested file N failed to open 3 Connection Timeout no connection within the SOCKET TIMEOUTT A N interval 4 Dat
246. ring consists of zero or more optional and required fields and has the following form Flags Width Precision Type Each field of a format specification is a single character or a number signifying a particular format option The simplest format specification contains only the percent sign and a type character for example d If a percent sign is followed by a character that has no meaning as a format field the character is copied to the return value For example to produce a percent sign in the return value use The optional fields which appear before the type character control other aspects of the formatting as follows Required character that determines whether the associated argument is interpreted as a character a string or a number c character signed decimal integer i signed decimal integer Type u unsigned decimal integer string o unsigned octal integer x unsigned hexadecimal integer X unsigned HEXADECIMAL integer Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 121 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Optional character or characters that control justification of output and printing of signs blanks and octal and hexadecimal prefixes More than one flag can appear in a format specification align the result in the given field width prefix the output with a sign if the type is signed if Width is prefixed with 0 zeroes
247. rom the connected device using INPUT N or FINPUT N statements s Return zero to terminate the connection one to return to the send function and two to be called again to receive more data See the Socket Programming section below for more information and sample programs SOCKET SYNC LISTEN N port connect recv send Initiates an incoming synchronous network socket reception as file N using the string representation of the IPv4 IP port number The status of the connection send receive and disconnect process is returned as the value of this numeric function which can return the following values SOCKET SYNC CONNECTC returns Description 0 Unknown No Status 1 Disconnect Done No Error 2 Open Error requested socket failed to open 3 Connection Timeout no connection within the SOCKET TIMEOUTT A N interval 4 Data Send Timeout no send data acknowledgment within the SOCKET TIMEOUTT HN interval 5 Receive Data Timeout no received data within the SOCKET TIMEOUTT N interval e The connect user function is called when a connection is established e The recv user function is then called to receive data from the connected device using INPUT N or FINPUT N statements s Return zero to terminate the connection one to return to the send function and two to be called again to receive more data e The send user function is called to send data to the conne
248. s blinking at the end of the line It s waiting for you to modify the line and tell it when you re done edit 10005 10005 PRINT CHR 226 CHR 148 CHR 140 _ You can move your blinking cursor left and right with the keyboard left and right arrow keys Some communication devices will also allow you to Home to the beginning of the line or End to the end of the line You can delete characters left of the cursor using the backspace key EJ If you want to quit editing without saving your changes use the double ESCape key When you want to stop editing and save your changes press the enter key ive One thing to remember about EDITing you re always in insert mode Any printable character that you type will be inserted into the line wherever the cursor is blinking If you make a mistake you can use the backspace key and retype it or use the arrow keys to move after it backspace and retype Use the left arrow key to move the cursor from the end of the line to the C in the last CHR 140 function Now press the backspace key to remove characters until the space after the PRINT Again use the left arrow key to move the cursor to the P in the PRINT The type in GOSUB 10100 the colon is important it allows you to group multiple commands on the same line When you re done making these changes the line should look like 10005 GOSUB 10100 PRINT CHR 140 If it doesn t look like this use the arrow keys backspace and typing to
249. s Only 2 Password only displayed 4 Lowercase Only 8 Uppercase Only 16 Read Only Here s a program that shows four textboxes with different styles and four label controls to receive the values entered into the textboxes when the Enter key is pressed 10 REM textboxes 15 ANSI ENABLE 0 BACKLIGHT 1 20 INCLUDE constants bas 25 CONST EnterKey 13 30 x ScreenHeight 72 35 FOR 0 TO 11 STEP 3 40 SCREEN OBJ TYPE n Label 45 SCREEN OBJ X n 0 x SCREEN OBJ Y n y n 3 48 50 SCREEN OBJ WIDTH O 0 90 SCREEN OBJ HEIGHT n 0 24 55 SCREEN OBJ TYPE Q n 1 Textbox 60 SCREEN OBJ X n 1 x 93 SCREEN OBJ Y n 1 y n 3 48 65 SCREEN OBJ WIDTH 1 60 SCREEN OBJ HEIGHT n 1 24 70 SCREEN OBJ MASK n 1 ValueEvents 75 SCREEN OBJ TYPE Q n 2 Label 80 SCREEN OBJ X n 2 160 SCREEN OBJ Y n 2 y n 3 48 85 SCREEN OBJ WIDTH 2 150 SCREEN OBJ HEIGHT n 2 24 90 NEXT 95 QFONT HALIGN O Right FONT HALIGN 1 Right 100 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 0 0 Password SCREEN OBJ OPTION 1 Style Password 105 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 0 3 Numbers SCREEN OBJ OPTION 4 Style NumbersOnly 110 SCREEN OBJ OPTION 4 NumberOfChars 4 115 jSCREEN OBJ TEXT 0 6 Uppercase SCREEN OBJ OPTION 7 Style Uppercase 120 SCREEN OBJ TEX
250. s the first two arguments as 32 bit integers and then divides by the third argument to return a 16 bit result We now have the pieces we need to draw our sweeping sonar screen To rotate the line we un draw it at its old angle then redraw it at the new angle as we sweep the angle through 360 degrees Here s the program 10 REM Sonar Sweep 20 ANSI ENABLE 0 BACKLIGHT 1 30 centerX 160 centerY 120 radius 90 40 DRAW FILL 0 0 320 240 RGB 0 0 0 50 DRAW CIRCLE centerX centerY radius RGB 255 255 255 60 FOR angle 0 TO 359 70 lineX MULDIV radius 1 COS angle 1024 80 lineY MULDIV radius 1 SIN angle 1024 90 DRAW LINE centerX centerY centerX oldLineX centerY oldLineY RGB 0 0 0 100 DRAW LINE centerX centerY centerX lineX centerY lineY RGB 255 255 255 110 oldLineX lineX oldLineY lineY 120 NEXT angle 130 GOTO 60 Ready And here s what your display should look like with the sweep line rotating counter clockwise around the circle origin Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 65 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Moving Smarter While this program works there is a lot of flickering of the sweep line and we have to keep track of the line s old position so that we can un draw it before redrawing it in its new position There is a better way using an approach called ping pong or double buffering With double buffering d
251. s withi Style i ener a Pd 54 Drawing BOXES D 55 Dr wing Circles nas he ete e pad i e ere Pee b m rede Wee ees 56 Drawing eno e n n e YE REO eb 56 Drawing Polygonsii ds dea o vd ede oed edit diei toe n ode ir degens 57 JD AMA EI PEE 58 Drawing Text with Style 3 e eee ee RR eiie 59 Itsa Matter of Resources ono npe nae E bee RS 59 There s Table of Dont 60 And Now Back to Drawing the nenne 62 Drawing IMG ES sc e eee ne n E t reet 63 R ules Tor Dr win t to epi per e e IW re ce e on e pere e pe rent en 64 Making Things oe I ire me Ut eir e iiiter i UE ce uinci 64 Warning Mathematics sis aite pete tei ge er bie ee d ep edt 65 Moving adu Re n D EUR S SU TU ere eU E ROOTED 66 Changing Direction en REPRESENT 68 Rules for Making Things Move essent teee trennen trennen rennen 69 Staging an epp OD URHEO eR RO DER rn 69 Rules Tor Events e C E RR ERES M E Ee 70 Taking Control with the Screen Framework eese nennen eene 71 Theresa Table 0f SCheens s piemonte eed sd 71 Scheming Controls 45 4e t SE etr e tp P ege ep Nes edens 71 Controlling Screens Objects iss og tee d e eed die eie deep dos 72 Touch B
252. sages can be constructed of multiple variables or constants but there must be an agreement between the client and server The PRINT N INPUT N combination allows the value of a single variable to be communicated The type of the variable must match between the PRINT N on one device and the INPUT N on the other device The FPRINT N FINPUT N combination allows the values of multiple variables to be communicated The order and type of the variables must match between the FPRINT N on one device and the FINPUT N on the other device While an output message can be constructed using multiple FPRINT N statements with trailing semi colons except for the last one the received input message must be handled by a single FINPUT N statement The maximum message size is limited to the maximum size of a string variable The sequence of messages must also be defined although the simplified half duplex implementation mandates that the connecting client device sends data first then receives and the listening server device receives data first then sends Multiple messages can be sent in each direction at a time as long as there is an agreed upon message value such as an empty message that can be used to switch direction Either end can disconnect first but if the client sends data that isn t acknowledged or is waiting to receive data a timeout will occur If the server sends data that isn t acknowledged a timeout will occur however if the server is waiting
253. sing the RESET push button on the back After the display performs its power up initialization the Configuration Settings screen should be displayed Configuration Settings Firmware Version 0 3 Press the on screen keypad down arrow once to select the Protocol setting Pressing the Enter key will open the setting for editing Use the up down arrows to change the setting to ACS Basic then press Enter again Configuration Settings ACS Basic x Min Value Default Value There s at least one more setting to configure If you re communicating using the display SERIAL port you should configure a matching baud rate that matches your attached communication device The display defaults to 9600 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Pressing the on screen keypad down arrow once more should show the Serial Baud Rate setting You can edit this in the same way to configure your desired baud rate Successive down arrows should advance you through the Serial Data Bits Serial Stop Bits and Serial Parity settings You should configure your terminal emulator with serial settings that matches your display s configuration The ColorLCD defaults to 9600 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Start Hyperterminal Tera Term VT PuTTY or other terminal emulator program on your connected computer PC Establish a connection to the connected serial port Power up or reset the ColorLCD If you ve configure
254. st re establish the connection each time the Display is power cycled or reset Once you see the message press the Enter key You should see an additional Ready prompt Once you see this message on your PC and Basic receives your key presses you re ready to begin Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 16 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 What the Color LCD Understands In this beginners section of the manual you will learn how to talk to the Color LCD In computer terminology this is referred to as programming Once you learn how to program you can get your display to do whatever you tell it to do usually The Color LCD understands a language called ACS Basic ACS Basic is a customized form of the Beginners All purpose Symbolic Instruction Code The original Basic was developed back in 1964 to provide computer access to people who didn t usually program This version provides additional commands and features that make it useful to program an interactive display Talking to the Color LCD Try pressing the key on your PC s keyboard The Color LCD display indicates that it is awaiting instruction by responding with Ready Ready is the display s prompt it is waiting for a command from you Try typing the following as your first command type this exactly as it is shown PRINT Hello World When you reach the end of the line review it for mistakes Did y
255. t gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 308 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Since the bits filling into the vacated MSB positions are copies of the sign bit bit 15 then 1234 gt gt 2 308 Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 1 0 1234 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 gt gt 2 15 1 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 308 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 119 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Expressions In ACS Basic expressions consist of one or more variables constants functions or system variables that may optionally be joined together by Operators The evaluation order may be controlled by the judicious use of parenthesis Expressions may be nested up to 10 levels Some examples a 10 Ready print a 30 300 Ready print fmt X02X a 0A Ready print a 2 40 Ready print a 2 0 0 Ready print a 2 0 1 Ready print a 4 Functions ACS Basic provides several functions that may be used in expressions There must not be a space between the function name and the opening parenthesis Functions must be used in a statement such as a LET or PRINT they cannot be executed standalone in immediat
256. t lt lt lt lt lt n n uo Hu m H m H ou H NM U H N H X X X X X X X X X R And here s the wrong way to nest loops Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 28 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 LIST 10 FOR X 20 FOR Y 3 PRINT X 40 NEXT X 50 NEXT Y Ready RUN X 1Y 3 Nesting error in line 40 NEXT var doesn t match FOR var Ready 1 TO 3 TO 3 1 STEP 1 xX Y Y The third thing to remember is that you shouldn t try to GOTO out of a FOR NEXT loop While you won t receive an immediate error the cleanup performed by the NEXT statement isn t performed and if you do it enough times you will get an error when there isn t sufficient memory left for the display to remember more FOR NEXT commands Exiting a FOR NEXT loop early is a fairly common programming requirement however so ACS Basic provides a system form of GOTO to jump out EXITFOR To try it modify our existing program First remove line 5 by typing 5 E And then add line 40 to indicate that we re done counting and provide a target line for the EXITFOR command 40 PRINT Done And finally add a condition check for exiting the FOR NEXT loop let s say when the count variable is equal to 5 we want to leave the loop Type 15 IF A 5 THEN EXITFOR 40 Your program should now look like LIST 10 FOR A 10 TO 1 STEP 1 15 IF A 5 THEN
257. t 9 lt gt 10 lt success connecting connect gt 1 lt gt 2 lt gt 3 lt gt 4 lt gt 5 lt gt 6 lt gt 7 lt gt 8 lt gt 9 lt gt 10 lt success connecting connect gt 1 lt gt 2 lt gt 3 lt gt 4 lt gt 5 lt gt 6 lt gt 7 lt gt 8 lt gt 9 lt gt 10 lt success connecting connect gt 1 lt gt 2 lt gt 3 lt gt 4 lt gt 5 lt gt 6 lt gt 7 lt gt 8 lt gt 9 lt gt 10 lt success connecting connect gt 1 lt gt 2 lt gt 3 lt gt 4 lt lt lt ESC at line 1090 gt gt gt Ready Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 183 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Blocking Server This is an example of a simple synchronous or blocking server It listens for connections of clients then receives data in the agreed upon format and echoes back what it has received Line 1005 uses an ON GOTO statement to print the results of the SOCKET SYNC LISTEN function The user defined function in lines 1060 1075 receives the value for variables n and recvdata from the connected client and returns a non zero value of one The send user defined function in lines 1080 1095 copies recvdata to senddata and outputs the value for variables n and senddata and returns a non zero value of one The send repeats until the client disconnects then the SOCKET SYNC LISTEN function returns Notice how the SOCKET SYNC LISTEN periodically times out and the program pr
258. t eret 142 PRINT expr expr 1 1 PRINT expr 5 expr 63 sss 142 PRINT N expr expr PRINT N expr 6 expr 143 PRINT USING fmt 4 expr expr expr 3 33 Gob sss 143 PRINT N USING fmt expri va expri H 143 READ var var var 2 eene 143 RETURN 143 REM a o gei re Hie nication 143 REN oldtilenewtile 5 oreet eee te ee P PO eH oe 144 RESO 1start end new eee taie eerie tea tee etd 144 RUN Ime RUN path Snc ak a ibe Sia nana eee eae aah 144 SAVE path cans Mince ena nO iio o oit bio idR IM 144 SEARCH string filename tie peter Unter EIS HERE ET eh 145 SIGNAL systemyvat iso Bie Reap A AS EE RM 145 SORT var 93 o otn ERRAT ERE ERA RARE ERREUR CARRERA 145 SMTP SERVER name ipaddress port usernameb64 passwordb64 145 SMTP SEND from to subject 146 SMTP SEND N from subject f header 0 147 SOCKET ASYNC CONNECT N ip port connect send 148 SOCKET ASYNC LISTEN N port connect recv send ess 148 STOP ss neenon o ate n
259. t is being accessed followed by the index to select the entry number in square brackets Accessing a Screen s object element requires a dual index to select the screen number then the object number Finally accessing a Screen Object s option element requires a triple index to select the screen number object number and option number Here s a diagram showing the system variables and indices SCREEN BIMAGE 0 QSCREEN OBJ 0 0 SCREEN OB4 0 1 Screen Table 4 SCREEN OB4 0 31 Screen 00 Screen 01 Screen 02 Screen 13 Screen 14 Screen15 SCREEN BIMAGE 15 QSCREEN OBJ 15 0 SCREEN OBJ 15 1 SCREEN OBJ 15 31 Touch Button Control Let s try drawing a simple screen with no background image and a single button labeled Press Type in the following short program 10 REM Button Demo 15 ANSI ENABLE 0 20 SCREEN 0BJ TYPE 0 0 2 REM Disable ANSI text REM Set screen 0 object to Button type REM Set button s scheme pair to 0 1 REM Set button s location on screen SCREEN OBJ TYPE O 0 SCREEN OBJ IMAGE j 0 0 SCREEN OBJ OVERLAY 0 0 SCREEN OBJ SCHEME O 0 SCREEN OBJ X 0 0 SCREEN OBuJ Y 0 0 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 0 0 SCREEN OBJ MASK O 0 SCREEN OBJ OPTION O 0 0 SC
260. ta Florida 94 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Screen SCREEN shown by SCREENS CHANGETO or SCREENS POP Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 95 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual SCREEN OBJ 8 September 2014 These system variables are used to access the individual attributes of the screen objects associated with each Screen table entry They require a double index the first index selects the Screen table entry and the second index selects the screen object entry for the selected screen entry The first index ranges from 0 to 15 to refer to the 16 Screen table entries and the second index ranges from 0 to 15 to refer to the 16 screen object table entries for each screen will not be skipped over and processing stops at the first unused entry Screen Table Screen 00 Screen 01 Screen 02 Screen 13 Screen 14 Screen 15 Screen object table entries have to be entered starting at zero and cannot have any gaps unused entries SCREEN OBJ TYPE O 0 4 9SCREEN BIMAGES O0 SCREEN OBV 0 0 5 0 0 SCREEN OBJ OVERLAY 0 0 SCREEN OBJ SCHEME 0 0 SCREEN OBJ X 0 0 SCREEN OBJ Y 0 0 SCREEN OBJ TEXT 0 0 SCREEN OBJ MASK O 0 SCREEN OBJ OPTION O 0 0
261. ted from the bitmap width divided by an OPTION value The auto advance of the image portion when touched can be disabled by an OPTION property Width BMP Resource gt 0 1 m Height N Width Height 1 SCREEN OBJ SCREEN VALUE 1 VALUE n TOUCHED A checkbox control can be implemented by using a IMAGE bitmap resource containing the checkbox with and without the checkmark Notice the magenta background which will become transparent when the control is rendered x Here s a short program that puts this checkbox the screen When it is run the checkbox can be toggled between unchecked and checked by touching it 5 REM Icon control used as Checkbox 10 ANSI ENABLE 0 20 0 0 1 30 SCREEN 0BJ IMAGE 0 0 Icon CheckBox Indexed 48x24 bmp 40 SCREEN OBJ X 0 0 160 SCREEN OBJ Y 0 120 100 SCREENS CHANGETO 999 GOTO 999 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 97 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 An animation capability can be achieved by advancing the object s VALUE property on a timer event causing the icon screen object to advance through the contained images Button Screen Object The Button screen object displays a bitmap with a TEXT label that acts like an on screen button The button can auto colorize for press release feedback usin
262. than an X since the X character is alphabetical and can be part of a name as we will see later There Are Rules The Color LCD is very literal If it doesn t understand what you have typed it will produce an error message to let you know Try typing this line deliberately misspelling the word PRINT PRIINT HI The Color LCD prints PRIINT HI Syntax error no equals Ready The display doesn t understand what you have typed The Syntax error message indicates that the command PRIINT is not one that it knows how to do It also tries to provide additional information to help you figure out the error no equals but in this case it is confused and this doesn t help Try leaving off the last quotation mark Type PRINT HI The Color LCD prints PRINT HI Mis matched quotes error Ready The Color LCD will also give you error messages when it does understand what you have typed but the command will result in incorrect operation For instance try typing PRINT 5 0 ree The display prints PRINT 5 0 Divide by zero error Ready This error message indicates that you re asking it to divide by zero which is not possible Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 18 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Remembering Numbers and Strings One of the features of the Color LCD is the ability to remember things you ask it to For example
263. the PRINT statement above apply PRINT USING fmt expr f expr expr 5 Prints zero or more formatted numeric or string expressions to the serial port e individual expressions are formatted with the specifications in the fmt string using the same format specification as the FMT function above e If the statement ends in a semicolon no Carriage Return Line Feed pair is appended to the printed expressions allowing multiple print statements to display on the same line When ANSILENABLE 1 the PRINT statement is also shown on the CFSound virtual display as drawn ANSI text See the ANSI Mode for information on how the text is rendered on the CFSound PRINT N USING fmt expr f expr expr S 3 Prints zero or more formatted numeric or string expressions to a previously opened file or internet streaming handle 3 0 9 e individual expressions are formatted with the specifications in the fmt string using the same format specification as FMT function above e If the statement ends in a semicolon no Carriage Return Line Feed pair is appended to the printed expressions allowing multiple print statements to display on the same line 10 REM show time 15 ONEVENT SECOND GOSUB 100 20 GOTO 20 100 PRINT USING 21 024 024 13 9HOUR MINUTE SECOND 105 RETURN Ready run 13 28 52 ESC at line 20 Ready READ var H var var Pro
264. the remote device using PRINT N or FPRINT N statements The send function should return one to wait for received data two to send more data or zero to disconnect Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 181 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 The process repeats between recv send calls until one of the functions returns zero or an error condition occurs The SOCKET SYNC LISTEN function then returns a numeric value representing the result of the connection SOCKET EVENT N Description 0 Unknown No Status 1 Disconnect Done No Error 2 n a the file open was done initially 3 Connection Timeout no connection within the SOCKET TIMEOUT N interval Data Send Timeout no send data acknowledgment within the SOCKET TIMEOUTT AN interval Receive Data Timeout no received data within the SOCKET TIMEOUTT N interval Communication Protocol In order for meaningful communication to take place both the Client and Server devices have to agree on the exchanged message sequence and format In the ACS Basic implementation messages are sent using the PRINT N or FPRINT N statements and messages are received using the INPUT N or FINPUT N statements A message is considered to be received when the trailing carriage return from the sending PRINT statement is seen by the corresponding INPUT statement Mes
265. then displays the formatted time on the connected ANSI terminal once a second 10 REM set the color lcd real time clock 15 INPUT set the RTC first y n s 20 IF s y THEN 35 25 IF s Y THEN 35 30 GOTO 155 35 INPUT month 1 12 m 40 IF m lt 1 THEN 35 45 IF m gt 12 THEN 35 5 MONTH m 55 INPUT date 1 31 d 60 IF d lt 1 THEN 55 65 IF d gt 31 THEN 55 70 DATE d 75 INPUT year 0000 9999 y 80 IF y 0 THEN 75 85 IF y 9999 THEN 75 90 QYEAR y 95 INPUT hour 00 23 h 100 IF h 0 THEN 95 105 IF h 23 THEN 95 110 HOUR h 115 INPUT minute 00 59 m 120 IF m 0 THEN 115 125 IF m gt 59 THEN 115 130 MINUTE m 135 INPUT second 00 59 s 140 IF s 0 THEN 135 145 IF s 59 THEN 135 150 SECOND s 155 ONEVENT SECOND GOSUB 170 160 a 0 165 GOTO 160 170 PRINT CHR 13 175 ON DOW GOSUB 265 270 275 280 285 290 295 180 ON MONTH GOSUB 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250 255 260 185 PRINT d m FMT 2d DATE FMT 2d YEAR 190 PRINT FMT X2d HOUR FMT 2d GMINUTE FMT X02d SECOND 195 RETURN 200 m RETURN 205 m JAN RETURN 210 m FEB RETURN 215 m MAR RETURN 220 m APR RETURN m MAY RETURN m JUN RETURN m JUL RETURN m AUG RETURN m SEP RETURN m 0CT RETURN m NOV RETURN m DEC RETURN d SUN RETURN d MON RETURN d TUE RETURN d WED RETURN d THU R
266. tion 95 angle 360 90 SECOND 6 360 Change line 150 to a RETURN statement and remove line 160 Now add line 85 to configure the SECOND event handler to call the new subroutine at line 95 85 ONEVENT SECOND GOSUB 95 And just to show that your program is capable of doing other things while updating the screen once a second replace line 90 with 90 1 PRINT GOTO 90 Your program should now look like 10 REM Sonar Sweep 20 ANSI ENABLE 0 BACKLIGHT 1 30 centerX 160 centerY 120 radius 90 40 leftX centerX radius 1 leftY centerY radius 1 width radius 1 2 height radius 1 2 5 SURFACE 2 60 DRAW FILL 0 0 320 240 RGB 0 0 0 70 DRAW CIRCLE centerX centerY radius RGB 255 255 255 75 DRAW BITMAP centerX 88 2 centerY 22 2 ButtonK4 bmp 80 SURFACE 1 85 ONEVENT SECOND GOSUB 95 90 a a 1 PRINT GOTO 90 95 angle 360 90 SECOND 6 X 360 100 DRAW COPY 2 leftX leftY leftX leftY width height 110 lineX MULDIV radius 1 COS angle 1024 120 lineY MULDIV radius 1 SIN angle 1024 130 DRAW LINE centerX centerY centerX lineX centerY lineY RGB 255 255 255 140 DRAW TOGGLE 150 RETURN If you run this program you will see the line rotating like a second hand clockwise 6 degrees every second At the same time your program is PRINTing an incrementing number Rules for Events 1 Events are interruptions to your pro
267. tions Since functions act like a variable you can use them wherever you would read a variable like in a PRINT command an IF THEN conditional check or in an expression The difference between a function and a variable is that you can t assign a value to a function you can only pass arguments to it and then use the value that it assumes as a result In computer terminology this is referred to as calling a function that takes an argument and returns a value It s like a variable but you don t assign values to it instead you pass it one or more arguments between the parenthesis and it acts like a variable whose value changes based upon the arguments There are other functions that are very useful when writing Basic programs Some take no arguments but return a value either numeric or string Some take one or more numeric arguments and return a numeric value Some take string arguments and return a numeric value Some take both string and numeric arguments and return a value So how do you know what type of value a built in function will return Just like a Basic variable it s all in the name If a built in function returns a string value the function name ends with a dollar sign otherwise it returns a numeric value This makes sense because functions can be used in place of variables Function Rules Functions behave like read only variables that can supply different values or behavior in your programs depending upo
268. to make the display remember the number 13 type this A 13 Now try the other PRINT commands that you did before To see if the display still remembers what A is equal to type PRINT A And the display should print PRINT A 13 Ready The Color LCD remembers that the placeholder A has the number value of 13 until you turn it off or change it Type A 17 Ee 17 Ready PRINT A 17 Ready So what happened When you first set A equal to 13 the display created a named memory location to hold that value You can refer to that location by the name A to retrieve the current value of the memory location as with the PRINT A command above You can also modify the value of the named memory location by setting it to a new value You can use combinations of letters and numbers to name these memory locations the only requirement is that the name must not start with a number Try typing these commands 15 C2 20 LongName 25 Now ask the Color LCD to retrieve all of these numbers by name Type PRINT A B C2 LongName And the display should show PRINT A B C2 LongName 17 15 20 25 Ready To get the Color LCD to remember strings of letters or numbers put a dollar sign at the end of the name Type A Remember this for me And then ask the display to display them PRINT A Remember this for me Ready Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 19 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Colo
269. to receive data and the client disconnects before the timeout this is not considered to be an error as it is the result of a normal client disconnection Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 182 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Socket Examples Here are some simple examples showing client and server blocking and non blocking Note that because the underlying communications protocol of using FINPUT N var var2 and FPRINT N var var2 are the same that the sample blocking client can call the sample blocking or non blocking server and vice versa Blocking Client The following program is an example of a simple synchronous or blocking client It is connecting to a server program on another device that essentially echoes back what it has received until the connection is terminated Line 1005 uses an ON GOTO statement to print the result of the SOCKET SYNC CONNECT function The send user defined function in lines 1065 1075 outputs an incrementing number and a random numeric string as long as n lt 10 and returns the non zero value one When n gt 10 the send function returns the zero value which causes the SOCKET SYNC CONNECT function to disconnect and exit The recv user defined function receives the echoed values and compares the returned string with what was sent If they are identical the recv function returns the non zero value one and the SOCKET SYNC
270. toggle specific bits by ing a value with the bits to toggle So the value 1234 with 255 is 1069 Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1234 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 4255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1069 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 The bitwise lt lt and gt gt perform left and right shifts of their left operand by the number of bit positions given by their right operand which must be positive Vacated bits on the right are filled by zeroes vacated bits on the left are filled with the value of the sign bit The bitwise lt lt shifts the bits towards the left from LSB towards MSB filling in the vacated LSB positions with zero bits Thus 1234 lt lt 2 4936 Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1234 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 lt lt 2 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 0 0 4936 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 The bitwise gt gt shifts the bits towards the right from MSB towards LSB filling in the vacated 5 positions with copies of the sign bit 15 Thus1234 gt gt 2 308 Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1234 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 gt gt 2 0 0 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt g
271. tring Arrays Variable names are case sensitive The may contain letters numbers and underscore but they must start with a letter They can be up to 32 characters long Numeric variables can assume the integer values 2 147 483 648 lt variable lt 2 147 483 647 Character Strings are limited to 255 characters in length Variable arrays are indexed with an array subscript enclosed in square brackets and must be DIMensioned before they are used The number of variables is limited only by the available memory Shorter variable names execute slightly faster Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 78 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 System Variables ACS Basic also has built in system variables System variables are denoted by character as the first character of the variable name The system variable names are tokenized when entered to save program memory and speed program execution for example the system variable SECOND would be tokenized to two bytes instead of seven bytes System variables may not be assigned a value by appearing in an FOR DIM INPUT READ FINPUT N or FREAD N statement Some system variables are read only and may not appear on the left hand side of a LET assignment statement Some system variables have Events associated with them and may be referenced in ONEVENT SIGNAL and WAIT statements See the description for the individual
272. ts a source string to insert into a zero based offset of where to insert and a string to add into the source string It returns the source string with the string to be added inserted at the numeric offset The source string is not directly modified by the function Let s try 1t REM test insert baseString ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ insertString insert REM insert at beginning PRINT INSERT baseString 0 insertString REM insert in middle PRINT INSERT baseString 13 insertString REM insert past end PRINT INSERT baseString 30 insertString Ready run insertABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ ABCDEFGHIJKLMinsertNOPQRSTUVWXYZ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZinsert Ready LEFT function takes two arguments a source string and the number of characters from the beginning of the string to return The source string is not directly modified by the function Let s try it REM test left baseString ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ REM take leftmost 5 characters PRINT LEFT baseString 5 REM take leftmost 10 characters PRINT LEFT baseString 10 Ready run ABCDE ABCDEFGHIJ Ready The function takes three arguments a source string zero based offset of where to start taking from and the number of characters to return The source string is not directly modified by the function The RIGHTS function takes two arguments a source string and the number of characters from the end of the string to
273. type something which it will assign to the variable Name Add one more line to the program to show the Name that was entered 40 PRINT Hi Name Now LIST the program It should look like LIST 10 PRINT Hello from the Color LCD 2 PRINT What s your name 30 INPUT Name 40 PRINT Hi Name Ready Now let s RUN the program RUN Hello from the Color LCD What s your name Steve Hi Steve Ready You can run the program many times answering the question with different names the display doesn t care what name you use After each RUN the variable Name holds the last name you entered You can make your program run over and over without having to type the RUN command each time Add this line to the program 50 GOTO 10 Now RUN the program It runs over and over without stopping The GOTO command told the Color LCD to go back up to line 10 Your program will repeat over and over because every time it executes line 50 it jumps back to line 10 In computer terminology this is referred to as a loop The only way to stop this endless loop is to press the J key twice in a row followed by the key This is known as ESCaping the program and the display tells you that you escaped Hello from the Color LCD What s your name ESC at line 30 Ready In this program the key was required following the double key because the Color LCD was waiting for the key at the INPUT command If the display is not waiti
274. u can use it on each side of the assignment equals sign For example type A 1 PRINT A A A 1 PRINT A With assignment A A 1 the current value of A has one added to it then it becomes the new value of A The value to add doesn t have to be 1 it can also be the value of another variable You can read this statement as Variable A equals the value of Variable A plus 1 So in order to count from 1 to 10 we can write the following short program Start fresh by typing NEW First we set the value of the counter A equal to 1 Type 10 1 Then we print it 20 PRINT A Then we add one to it Type 30 A A 1 Then we check to see if A is less than or equal to 10 and if so we loop back to print the new value Otherwise we re done counting 40 IF A lt 10 THEN GOTO 20 Now list the program It should look like LIST 10 A 1 20 PRINT A BOA A 1 40 IF A lt 10 THEN GOTO 20 Ready Now RUN it Simple right However ACS Basic provides another way to count with fewer commands that s a little easier to read Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 26 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Start fresh by typing NEW amp again Now we will work with a new two command combination FOR NEXT The FOR command replaces two commands line 10 the setting of the initial count value and line 40 the check for the end count valu
275. u provide the center width height and starting ending angles Here s the command format DRAW ARC x y width height start end color Draws an arc centered at x y of width height beginning at start angle and ending on end angle on the current drawing SURFACE using color x y width height start end color center x coordinate 319 center coordinate 240 arc width 0 319 arc height 0 240 starting angle 0 359 ending angle 0 359 RGB565 box pixels color Here s the program 10 REM draw a red 90 degree arc at the screen center 15 ANSI ENABLE 0 20 DRAW FILL 0 0 320 240 RGB 0 0 0 25 DRAW ARC 160 120 100 100 45 135 RGB 255 0 0 30 GOTO 30 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 53 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Drawing Arcs with Style There s another arc drawing command that allows the arc to be styled Here s the command format DRAW ARC STYLED x y width height start end color style Draws a styled arc centered at x y of width height beginning at start angle and ending on end angle on the current drawing SURFACE using color x y width height start end color style center x coordinate 319 center coordinate 240 arc width 0 319 arc height 0 240 starting angle 0 359 ending angle 0 359 RGB565 box pixels color combi
276. u to do this While it is simple to use there are a few caveats 1 The image to be drawn on the screen must be a Windows BMP bitmap file 2 The image must be resident in the display s memory by being a Resource in the Resource table To quickly try this command we ll use one of the built in image resources Use a RESOURCES LIST command with a wildcard name pattern to list all of the image resources resources list bmp ButtonK bmp 1 610 builtin ButtonK2 bmp 2 050 builtin ButtonK4 bmp 3 018 builtin ButtonM bmp 2 618 builtin Ready The names suggest that these are images of the buttons that the display uses for the Configuration Settings screen keyboard They have to be built in so that they are always there even when no other resources are loaded So let s draw one of the button images in the center of the screen As before here s the command format from the Reference DRAW BITMAP x y imageResourceName Renders the bitmap x image lower left x coordinate 0 319 resource on the y image lower left y coordinate 0 240 current drawing the string name of the loaded image SURFACE at x y resource to draw imageResourceName Type the following commands first let s clear the screen draw fill 0 0 320 240 RGB 0 0 0 This leaves the Ready prompt and blinking cursor at the top of the screen OK for now Now let s draw the ButtonK4 bmp image at the center of the screen Type the following c
277. ue otherwise it causes a Syntax error A few examples PRINT HEX VAL 09AB 2475 Ready PRINT HEX VAL X91 Syntax error can t parse HEX VAL argument to number Ready The LEN function takes a string argument and returns its length how many characters does it contain This will be very useful later when you re trying to manipulate strings in your programs Let s try it PRINT LEN Now is the time 15 Ready PRINT LEN 0 Ready The MULDIV function takes three numeric arguments and returns the result of multiplying the first two together then dividing by the third What s the value of that Why can t you just do A B C The magic is that the three numeric arguments are converted from 32 bit signed integers to 64 bit signed integers first then the multiply and divide are performed then the result is converted back to a 32 bit signed integer and returned Without this function the only numbers that you could multiply together with a correct result would have to have a product of no more than 2 147 483 647 The MULMOD function takes three numeric arguments and returns the result of multiplying the first two together and then taking the modulo with the third Here s an example of using both MULDIV and MULMODY to calculate 55 percent of 999 Using 16 bit integer math would cause an overflow list 10 REM calculate 55 percent of 999 999 55 100 549 45 20 PRINT MULDIV 999 55 100 MULMOD 999
278. using events Screens can be DRAWn on after they are constructed but not by using the double buffering technique to be continued Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 76 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 ACS Basic Reference ACS Basic is an integer microcomputer basic designed for simple control applications ACS Basic executes programs consisting of one or more statements Statements consist of an optional line number followed by reserved keyword commands specifying operations for Basic to perform followed by required and or optional arguments Statements that begin with a line number are entered and held sorted by line number until Basic is commanded to execute them This is called the Program mode of operation Statements entered without a line number are evaluated and executed immediately This is called the Direct mode of operation Some keyword commands are Direct mode only and may not appear in a program Some keyword commands are Program mode only and may not be evaluated and executed immediately after being typed in These limitations are listed in the keyword command definitions below Programs In ACS Basic a Program consists of one or more program lines Each program line consists of a line number followed by one or more statements Valid line numbers range from 1 to 2 147 483 647 Multiple 66 99 statements in a program line must be separated by colons
279. using the RGB function which they can be The next four columns control the relative positioning of the characters when text is rendered with this font entry The SPACINGX column controls the spacing between characters of the font A value of 0 will use the fixed width of the font to place the following character A 1 will use the bounding box character width for horizontal spacing A non zero positive value will force that spacing character to character when fonts are oriented horizontally The SPACINGY column works in the same way but affects vertical spacing when fonts are oriented vertically this operation is not currently supported The ALIGN columns control the relative placement of the drawn text relative to the starting coordinate provided the DRAW TEXT command or the text alignment to the coordinates The HALIGN entry controls the horizontal alignment a value of 0 justifies the text from the left a value of 1 centers the text and a value of 2 justifies the text from the right The VALIGN entry controls the vertical alignment a value of 0 justifies the text from the top a value of 1 centers the text and a value of 2 justifies the text from the bottom The last two columns control the transparency of the rendered text A transparent pixel is not drawn with the result that anything it is drawn on top of will show through The BTRANS column controls the Copyright 201
280. utton Control e n e erre o estet d Ru e RO eR CO RE 72 Multiple Objects nas Eee e e ee f eI dues 74 Diving Into the Screen Framework esee eee 75 Rules for the Screen Framework eese enne ener nene ene 76 ACS Basic Reference esee eee sinat ata sata 77 PLO STAINS LEEREN 77 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Variables E Y 78 System Variables Rte e EI aoe ante adn Erie ve n e HEU RE ab eb chaste 79 OM R S RE MEI nee eem 79 QCONTACTI x ue sen eta Re ech eae Ne hee 79 CLOSURE X AEE 79 OPENING reed RH RR s 80 CAPTURE x CAPTURE CLOSURES x 80 PWM PERIOD X 9PWM ON x eere 80 ULE SIZE FN er ee tede ei ere te ee Hd e eee e gets 80 5 Rees 80 QFEOE IN onem eI e PR eve ee eb E EE 80 SOCKETEVENT FN 38 505 ini aie Re i eee eB ege 81 SOCKET TIMEOUT SN tte etre ret EU HR RIA ORE ERE 81 SECOND MINUTE HOUR DOW 9 DATE MONTH G YEAR 81 SO
281. variable names 10 PRINT Hello from the Color LCD RUN Hello from the Color LCD Ready run Hello from the Color LCD Ready So the number at the beginning of the line tells Basic to store the line instead of executing it Let s add another line to the program The number at the beginning of the line is the line number Type 20 print What s your name Now let s ask the Color LCD to show us the entire program Type LIST The display LISTs your entire program so far notice how the lower case print command was capitalized and how the lines are stored and shown in line number order LIST 10 PRINT Hello from the Color LCD 20 PRINT What s your name Ready Now run the program Type RUN The Color LCD prints RUN Hello from the Color LCD What s your name Ready Try answering the question by typing your name and pressing there s that Syntax error again the display didn t understand what you meant when you typed in your name RUN Hello from the Color LCD What s your name Ready Steve Syntax error no equals Ready In fact you have to instruct the Color LCD to accept your answer by giving it a command INPUT to do so Add this line to the program 30 INPUT Name Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 21 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 The INPUT command tells the display to stop and wait for you to
282. vent 0 no event 1 touchscreen press event 2 touchscreen move event 3 touchscreen release event Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 116 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 TOUCH X This system variable holds the X coordinate of the TOUCH EVENT TOUCH Y This system variable holds the Y coordinate of the TOUCH EVENT Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 117 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 Operators ACS Basic supports the following operators listed in priority from highest to lowest Operators encountered during statement execution are evaluated in order of priority with higher priority operators executed before lower priority operators Operators work between a left and right operand unary operators only work on a right following operand wor 7 mimis Fs complemen 7 inary Biwi NOT F s complement 7 s 7 Mutiptication division e sering concatenation 5 __ ___ Subtraction 5 lt lt gt gt Left Shift Right Shift 4 lt gt Assign test equal test NOT equal numeric or string DET EE _ Test Less Than Less than or Equal Greater Than Greater than or lt gt gt 3 Equal numeric or string Bitwise AND OR Exclusive OR AND OR Logical AND OR Parenthesis may be used to ch
283. vent handler executes The subroutine at lines 1000 1040 draws the clock First the background surface is copied into the work surface Line 1015 converts the RTC 24 hour time to 12 hour Line 1020 computes the angle for the hour hand then calls a subroutine to draw it Line 1025 computes the angle for the minute hand then calls the same subroutine to draw it Line 1030 computes the angle for the second hand then calls a subroutine to draw it Line 1035 then exchanges the work and display surfaces and line 1040 returns from the event handler The hand drawing subroutines initialize the polygon coordinate arrays for the appropriate hand drawn at a zero angle The FOR NEXT loop in lines 2010 2035 rotate the polygon coordinates to the angle for the time value Line 2040 draws the rotated polygon clock hand and line 2045 returns to the event handler 1 REM clock demo 15 ANSI ENABLE 0 BACKLIGHT 1 25 DIM x 3 y 3 30 SURFACE 2 DRAW BITMAP TRANSP 0 RGB 0 255 0 0 0 Clockface bmp SURFACE 1 35 ONEVENT SECOND GOSUB 1000 40 GOTO 40 1000 REM draw clock 1005 h HOUR s SECOND 1010 DRAW COPY 2 0 0 0 0 239 239 1015 IF h gt 12 THEN h h 12 1020 a 450 h 3 m 2 360 r 60 c RGB 0 GOSUB 1900 1025 a 450 m 6 s 10 X360 r 90 c RGB 0 0 0 GOSUB 1900 1030 450 5 6 360 90 6 255 0 0 605 2000 1035 DRAW TOGGLE 1040 RETURN 1900 REM draw minute or hour hands 1905 x 0 y 4 x 1 0 y 1 4 x 2
284. verted is 0 the result is no characters output c Precision has no effect Precision as D Precision specifies the minimum number of digits to be output If the number of digits is less than Precision the output is padded on the left with zeroes The value is not truncated when the number of digits exceeds Precision d i u o x X Precision specifies the maximum number of characters to be output Characters in excess of Precision are not output 10 REM show time 15 ONEVENT SECOND GOSUB 100 20 GOTO 20 100 PRINT FMT c 2d 02d O2d 13 HOUR QMINUTE SECOND 105 RETURN Ready run 13 30 13 ESC at line 20 Ready GETCH expr If expr evaluates to zero GETCH 0 returns the numeric value of the next available serial character if GMSGENABLE O or it returns a 1 if no character is currently available from either enabled source If expr evaluates to non zero GETCH 1 waits for the next available serial character if MSGENABLE 0 and then returns its numeric value HEX STR expr digits Returns a string containing the hexadecimal representation of the expression The optional digits parameter specifies the number of digits PRINT HEX STR 43690 AAAA Ready PRINT HEX STR 43690 6 Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 122 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 HEX VAL var Returns
285. via the SCREEN system variables which are indexed by the screen number The individual fields in the Screen Objects in each screen are accessed via the SCREEN OBJ system variables which are indexed by both the screen number and screen object number Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 166 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 The following commands are provided to manage the contents of the Screens table SCREENS INIT Initializes the Screens table SCREENS LIST Lists the contents of the Screens table SCREENS LOAD filename screens Loads the Screens table from a JSON formatted file on the micro SD card See the appendix JSON File Formats in the Color 320x240 LCD Display Terminal User s Manual SCREENS SAVE filename screens Saves the Screens table to a JSON formatted file on the micro SD card See the appendix JSON File Formats in the Color 320x240 LCD Display Terminal User s Manual The following commands are provided to operate the Screen system SCREENS CHANGETO screenNumber Constructs and displays the contents of the Screens table screenNumber entry Changing to the first screen is used to startup the operation of the Screens system Before any DRAWing command can be used after a SCREENS CHANGETO the screen has to be fully constructed as indicated by the SCREEN EVENT system variable event being signaled SCREENS PUSHTO screenNumber Saves the
286. wing the image based upon on a timer event or an indicator that can change its appearance upon some condition DRAW BITMAP TRANSP mode color x y imageResourceName Draws a bitmap image from the resource table using transparency mode and color at x y Where mode Operation color Description For indexed BMP images the index value 0 Magic Value Magic index or magic color corresponding to the magic color For 16bpp BMP images the RGB565 magic color 1 None Not used Surface pixel image pixel RGB565 color to be used as a Surface pixel surface pixel RGB565 color 2 Darken au multiplier can darken image Surface pixel surface pixel image pixel 5 6 5 3 Source Color Filter Not used channel by channel multiply color filter from image Surface pixel surface pixel RGB565 color 4 Source Alpha Mask RGB565 color to be used as a 1 image pixel surface pixel white replacement treats image as an alpha mask white solid black transparent intermediate blended Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 163 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 5 Fill RGB565 fill color Surface pixel RGB565 color 6 Transparency Blend RGB565 color to use as an Alpha multiplier Surface pixel RGB565 color image pixel 1 RGB565 color surface pixel blends image into surface by ratio determined by RGB565 co
287. wn using the second scheme in the pair If the Textbox is touched the keypad pops up and the outline rectangle changes from solid to dashed and animates to show that the object has focus The keypad is popped above or below the control depending upon the control s Y coordinate so as not to obscure the it Textboxes that are styled as Numbers Only present the numeric keypad The current contents of the TEXT value is selected Keys that are typed on the popup keypad are entered into the object s TEXTS value replacing the selection A backspace Bs key removes the last key pressed A carriage return Enter key un focuses the control and hides the pop up keypad Each typed key is reported as a change in the screen object s VALUE along with a value changed event There are several textbox styles that are configurable as bit values in the object s OPTION register As these are binary weighted bit values they may be combined for example a password textbox that only accepts numbers would be styled using a value of 1 2 3 A style of Uppercase only takes precedence over Lowercase only A style of Read Only performs focusing and keypad pop up but the TEXT value cannot be changed by key presses only by code changes to the TEXTS value Copyright 2010 2014 by ACS Sarasota Florida 108 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming Manual 8 September 2014 The available textbox style are Style bit function 1 Number

ACS Color 320 x 240 LCD Basic Programming

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents